Nortel Networks Telephone DCT1900 User Manual

CHAPTER 2

System Overview

The DCT1900 system may operate as a standalone system or as a mobility system when used in

conjunction with the Mobility Server. Figures 2-1 and 2-2 show an overview of the environments in which

the DCT1900 system may be applied.

The DCT1900 Standalone configuration consists of a single RE and its associated Base Stations con-

nected to a PBX. In the standalone configuration the RE will connect towards the telephone network with

either analog type trunks or a T1/E1 channel associated signalling trunk. The DLU provides an intelligent

interface between the Freeset and a proprietary digital PBX. The DLU emulates a digital phone set of the

PBX and allows Freeset users to take advantage of digital phone set features. A DCT1900 Standalone

configuration provides for wireless phone service in a simple and cost efficient manner.

Digital Phone Set Features

The DLU supports the following digital phone set features to the Freeset DCT1900 DT620 and

9p23 Portable Telephones:

• Multiple Line Appearance

• Caller Line Identity

• Connected Line Identity

• Redirected Party Number

• Message Waiting Indication

• Transfer

• Conference

• Hold

• Reconnect

• Call Back

• Cancel Call Back

The DCT1900 Mobility configuration provides for one or more REs connected to a Mobility Server, which

will then connect towards the telephone network. Large integrated networks of DCT1900 Portable

Telephones can be built up using multiple REs and one or more Mobility Servers. The Mobility Server(s)

provide the capability of intersystem handovers and roaming. In the case of an intersystem handover, a

Portable Telephone user can be on a call while moving from the radio coverage area of one RE to the radio

coverage area of another RE without any disruption to the call. In the case of roaming in a DCT1900

Mobility configuration, a Portable Telephone can originate or accept a call in the radio coverage area of any

RE. Additional features that the DCT1900 Mobility configuration may support when combined with a

compatible PBX are Calling Line ID type displays and message indicators.

DCT1900 features such as phone authentication, encryption, and handover between Base Stations on the

same RE apply to either the DCT1900 Standalone configuration or the DCT1900 Mobility configuration.

The signalling interfaces that the RE presents towards the phone network are different in the case of a

DCT1900 Standalone and a DCT1900 Mobility configuration. Table 2-1 summarizes the signalling

differences between the two configurations.

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

2-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

System Description, System Overview

DCT1900

System

Type

Signalling

Format to

Network

Provides

Connection to

Signalling Functionality

Standalone Analog

Interface is over a 3Khz analog 2-wire connection.

Basic signalling states such as on-hook, off-hook and

ringing supported by voltage and current conditions

on the line.

PBX’s

Standalone Digital

Digital line interface over individual 2 wire connec-

tions. Proprietary digital signal encoding, which con-

veys basic call information and additional call

information such as Calling Line Identifier, Call redi-

rection numbers, message waiting indicators, multi-

line operation, etc. There are 12 circuits per board

and each circuit carries one voice call.

Standalone T1 CAS

Standalone E1 CAS

Digital trunk interface operating at 1,544,000 bits per

second supplying 24 voice channels per circuit.

There are 2 circuits per board for a total of 48 voice

channels. Signalling is done via robbed bit signalling

with 2 bits per voice circuit encoding basic signalling

states such as on-hook, off-hook and ringing.

PBX’s

Digital trunk interface operation at 2,048,000 bits per

second supplying 30 voice channels per circuit.

There are 2 circuits per board for a total of 60 voice

channels. E1 circuits use ISDN type protocol.

Ericsson MD110

proprietary

Mobility

T1 CCS or Interface over a T1 line at 1,544,000 bps or an E1

Mobility Server

E1 CCS

line at 2,048,000 bps. One channel on the interface

is dedicated to a digital signalling protocol operating

at 64,000 bps. The digital signalling channel carries

an ISDN type protocol, which conveys basic call

information and additional call information such as

Calling Line Identifier, Call redirection numbers,

message waiting indicators, etc. Because the

signalling channel occupies one of the time slots on

the T1 or E1 interface, a T1 CCS trunk can carry 23

voice calls per circuit and an E1 CCS trunk can carry

30 voice calls per circuit. There are two circuits per

board.

Table 2-1 DCT1900 Network Signalling Summary

2-2

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Programming

CSM

Analog Interface,

Digital Line Interface

PWT/Air Interface

T1/E1 CAS Interface

PBX/CO

SMS

Server

Fig. 2-1 System Overview DCT1900 Standalone Environment

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

2-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

System Description, System Overview

Site A

Programming

PWT air interface

Server

CSM

T1/E1

CCS

Sw.

PBX/CO

Area A

Inter system handover & roaming

Area B

CSM

Inter system handover & roaming

Site B (remote)

T1/E1

CCS

Swt.

PBX/CO

Area C

CSM

Server

Fig. 2-2 System Overview DCT1900 Mobility Environment

2-4

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

In Figures 2-1 & 2-2 the relevant products covered by this manual are marked in gray. The

following items are recognized:

DCT1900:

: Radio Exchange

: Base Station

: Portable Telephone

CSM : Cordless System Manager

Other:

PBX

: Private Branch Exchange

: Mobility Server

: Central Office

2.1

Operational Concepts

Operational Environment

The DCT1900 is designed for mobility within the defined coverage area of the system. If the

defined coverage area of one system is too small, then in conjunction with the MS, several

DCT1900 systems can be connected together to act as if they were one large system.

Environmental External Dependencies

The DCT1900 system, as shown in Figures 2-1 & 2-2 depends on the following external systems

to provide the required services:

Private Branch Exchange (PBX)

Mobility Server (MS)

Central Office (CO)

Functional External Dependencies

The following external systems provide the following functions:

The PBX is a switch, providing:

Standard switching services

Calling party identity

Voice mail services

Paging services

Access point to the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)

The MS is an adjunct to the PBX. It provides:

In combination with two or more DCT1900 systems, the ability to roam freely between

different locations.

The ability to handover between different REs while in a call.

The ability via a single number (Portable User Number) to reach users in geographically

different locations.

The means of configuring the MS and initializing and activating the Portable Telephones.

The ability to dial in to the server and use your office extension, change you personnal

settings and acces you voice mail.

Message waiting indication

Call Waiting

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

2-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

System Description, System Overview

System Architecture

The DCT1900 system provides a wireless infrastructure between the user and the MS/PBX. The

system can serve multiple users at the same time.

The system can be split up in a fixed part (made up of one RE and multiple Base Stations) and

many Portable Telephones. The basic configuration of a DCT1900 system allows:

Several systems to provide the same service as one large system. A user with one Portable

Telephone is able to walk around in different areas covered by different systems without

interrupting an ongoing call. This feature is known as inter-system handover.

A user can use the same Portable Telephone in another area or remote site, keeping the same

number. This feature is known as inter-site roaming.

Different aspects of the DCT1900 system are discussed below.

Radio Exchange Synchronization (DCT1900 Mobility Configuration only)

In order to support the inter-system handover capability, REs have to be synchronized. REs are

synchronized using a master/slave concept, where one master RE supplies a synchronization

signal to a number of slave REs. A slave RE can act as a master for three further slave REs, thus

creating a multi level star network with a maximum of two levels, see Figure 2-3.

Slave

Master

Level 1

Slave

Level 2

Figure 2-3 Synchronization Topology

In the master RE, it is possible to select the synchronization source between an internal clock and

a T1 or E1 interface to the Mobility Server.

In case the synchronization is lost (e.g. due to cable failure) on a slave RE, the slave will generate

an alarm on the Mobility interface to notify the MS. However, the slave will continue to operate and

2-6

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

will still synchronize slaves connected to it, effectively forming a separate "sub cluster" within

which seamless handovers are still possible.

The delay in the cable used to synchronize the REs must be measured and entered into each of

the slave REs. The accuracy of this delay measurement is very important and must be taken with

care.

Registration

Registration entails the Portable Telephone establishing a link with the RE/MS, whereby the

Portable Telephone tells the RE/MS who it is, i.e. extension number, system number range, home

node number, and the RE/MS authorizes the Portable Telephone to use its resources to make and

receive calls.

In the case of a DCT1900 mobility configuration with multiple Mobility Servers:

If the MS is not the Home MS, then there must be a physical connection (QSIG Tie Line)

between the Home MS and the MS the phone is trying to register to.

The Portable Telephone’s PUN and authentication key must be known by its’ home MS.

The system number of the RE must be within the system range initialized in the Portable

Telephone.

Start of Registration

Registration starts whenever:

The Portable Telephone is switched on and sees a system (within the allowed system range).

When the Portable Telephone sees a system with better receive signal strength quality than

the current one which is also in its system range (the Portable Telephone will roam to another

system).

The system asks the Portable Telephone to do so (initiated by the RE/MS). This function

updates databases which may contain corrupted data (e.g. after restarts of system or RE/MS).

Note:

When a Portable Telephone goes out of range and comes back in range of the same RE, the

registration procedure will not be repeated.

Registration Successful

If all requirements are met, the registration will succeed. Note that this dynamic behavior means

that only at this point will a Portable Telephone be registered in a system. There will never be a

fixed relation between a system and a PUN!

Registration Failures

The registration process may result in a rejection from the RE/MS. If the PUN of the Portable

Telephone is not initialized in the RE/MS or when the authentication keys in the Portable

Telephone and RE/MS are different, the Portable Telephone will be rejected. The result will be that

the Portable Telephone will not try again. Only when the Portable Telephone is switched off and on

again, or searched by the RE/MS or by the system, will it try to register again.

The process can also fail because of other reasons. For example, when a connection set–up failed

or when congestion occurred in a particular Base Station RE/MS, the registration process will

automatically start again after some time.

When a Portable Telephone moves from a RE where it was registered to a new RE and the

registration fails on that new RE, it will still be registered in the RE where it came from.

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

2-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

System Description, System Overview

De–registration

De–registration is the process where the authorization at registration is removed. Once the user is

de-registered, he can no longer be reached. A user can de–register from the RE by switching the

Portable Telephone off, or by roaming to another system.

Whenever the RE is not able to inform the MS (e.g. congestion in the MS) about the de-

registration, the RE will repeat it every time there is an incoming call for that specific Portable

Telephone.

Authentication

The authentication of a Portable Telephone is done during registration and at incoming or outgoing

call establishment. It will be executed according to the PWT Standard Authentication Algorithm

(PSAA). The algorithm uses the authentication key that is downloaded over the programming

cable into the Portable Telephone during initialization.

In a DCT1900 Mobility Server configuration for performance reasons, a session key (temporary

key, reissued at registration time) will be stored locally in the RE as the result of a registration, to

allow authentication without consulting the MS during call establishment.

Inter System Handover (DCT1900 Mobility Configuration Only)

Inter system handover is the capability in a mobility configuration of a Portable Telephone that is

handed over automatically to another RE when leaving the coverage area of one RE and moving

into a coverage area of another RE. When a user moves to a new RE (refer to Figure 2–2), on

request of the MS the old RE will remove the relation between the moved Portable Telephone and

the old RE (de–registration) while the new RE adds the relation between it and the Portable

Telephone (registration). Handovers from one RE to another can only be achieved when all of the

following conditions apply:

Base Stations of different RE’s meet the PWT specifications.

The REs involved are synchronized.

Both REs have system numbers that fall within the Portable Telephone system range.

The Portable Telephone detects a stronger signal from the new RE than the old RE.

If these conditions are not met, the inter system handover will not be seamless or the call can even

be lost when the Portable Telephone tries to move to the new RE.

If two REs operate in overlapping areas, a Portable Telephone may need to choose between an

intra system (to another Base Station of the same RE) and an inter system handover. In these

situations, the Portable Telephone will prefer an intra system handover. In general, a 6dB signal

strength improvement is required for an intra system handover while a 12dB improvement is

required for an inter system handover.

Roaming (DCT1900 Mobility Configuration Only)

Roaming is a feature whereby a Portable Telephone moves between two geographically separate

but electronically connected MSs with the attendant REs. When turned on in its home coverage

area, the Portable Telephones’ connectivity and functionality is normal. When turned on in the

other MS coverage area, the Portable Telephone registers itself as a visitor and this MS

communicates with the other MS to let it know that the Portable Telephone is now active on the

other RE. Any calls to the Portable’s PUN will then be routed to the new MS to be passed on to the

Portable Telephone.

2-8

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

2.2

Roaming and Handover Handling by the Portable Telephone

Sections 2.2.1 and 2.2.2 describe when the Portable Telephone starts internal (intra cell, same

Base Station), external (inter cell, another Base Station of the same RE) and inter system

handovers (another Base Station of another RE) and location updates (roaming).

2.2.1 Unlocked Situation

When the Portable Telephone is first turned on, it will regularly scan the air interface. As soon as

the Portable Telephone detects a bearer signal from a Base Station, it will lock to this bearer. A

bearer is an active PWT air interface channel in which transmissions take place. When a Base

Station is idle (there are no calls routed via this Base Station), it transmits a dummy bearer which is

also referred to as a beacon signal. Dummy bearers enable the Portable Telephone to lock on to

an idle Base Station and to scan the environment.

If the synchronizing system number is not part of one of the Portable Telephone subscriptions, the

Portable Telephone will scan the air interface again.

If the synchronizing system number is part of the system range of one of the Portable Telephone

subscriptions, that subscription will be selected and the Portable Telephone will use the bearer as

a standby bearer. From this moment on the Portable Telephone will start to collect data

concerning the situation in other channels on the air interface. This synchronous situation is

described in the paragraphs below.

The Portable Telephone falls back to asynchronous roaming if during a certain period of time no

valid frames are received. In this case all collected data concerning the situation in other channels

is cleared.

To limit the energy consumption during the unlocked situation, the Portable Telephone will go into

a sleep mode if it does not find a bearer within 10 minutes. The sleep mode will be interrupted

every 2 minutes, when the Portable Telephone performs one full scan to see if there are any

systems present.

2.2.2 Locked Situation

Environment Scanning by the Portable Telephone

If the Portable Telephone is locked to a standby bearer, it maintains a list of information for each

channel on the air interface. This is called a history list, which contains the following information:

RSSI:

For each channel, a received "Received Signal Strength

Indication" (RSSI) value is stored. For an active bearer, this is an

indication of the strength of the received signal. For an idle

channel, this is an indication of the noise level.

RQI:

For each channel with an active bearer or dummy bearer, a

"Received Quality Indication" (RQI) value is stored. The RQI

value is determined by the number of correctly/incorrectly

received frames.

Base Station & System ID:

For each channel with an active bearer, the Portable Telephone

will store the identification of the Base Station and RE.

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

2-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

System Description, System Overview

System Status

A Portable Telephone contains a list of the current RE status. For each system, the status may be:

NOT_ALLOWED:

TEMP_NOT_ALLOWED:

The Portable Telephone is not allowed to access this RE.

The Portable Telephone is currently not allowed to access this

RE, but may be allowed to access this RE in the future.

The Portable Telephone is allowed to access this RE.

ALLOWED:

Roaming

If the Portable Telephone is locked to a certain Base Station, two types of roaming are supported:

voluntary roaming, when a better bearer is available, or forced roaming, when the current bearer is

no longer valid. If the Portable Telephone is locked to a RE, it regularly scans its environment.

During the environment scan alternative REs are investigated and a bearer set–up may be

attempted.

Voluntary Intra System Roaming

Voluntary intra system roaming takes place if the Portable Telephone detects a Base Station of

which the signal strength is at least 6dB stronger than the current bearer, and remains at least this

amount stronger during a number of consecutive frames.

Voluntary Inter System Roaming

Voluntary inter system roaming takes place when:

The RE status of the other RE is higher than the system status of the current RE. If the RE

status of the other RE is higher than the RE status of the current RE during a number of

consecutive frames, a location update will be started.

The RE status of the other RE is equal to the RE status of the current RE. If the RE status of

the other RE is equal to the RE status of the current RE and the RSSI is at least 12dB stronger

than the current bearer RSSI during a number of consecutive frames, a location update will be

started.

The RE status of the other RE is lower than the RE status of the current RE. If, during a

number of consecutive frames, the RE status of the other RE is lower than the RE status of the

current RE and the RSSI of the best bearer of a Base Station of the other RE is at least 12dB

stronger and the Portable Telephone does not see any other Base Stations of this RE and the

current Base Station has no further bearers available, the Portable Telephone will start a

location update.

Forced Intra System Roaming

If the current bearer cannot be used any more, the Portable Telephone will immediately try to

switch to the best bearer on the current RE.

Forced Inter System Roaming

If the bearers of the current RE cannot be used any more, the Portable Telephone will immediately

try to switch to the best bearer of alternative REs.

Handover

During a call, two types of handover are supported again: voluntary handover and forced

handover. If there are no problems with the current bearer, the Portable Telephone will investigate

alternative bearers during a call. Handling of the forced handover is critical because in this case

the speech service is disrupted.

2-10

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Voluntary Intra System Handover

If the best bearer of another Base Station is at least 6dB or better during a number of consecutive

frames, the Portable Telephone will start a handover to that Base Station.

Voluntary Inter System Handover

For handovers, only REs with the RE status ALLOWED and TEMP_NOT_ALLOWED are

considered as alternatives:

The RE status of the other RE is equal to the RE status of the current RE. If the best bearer of

a Base Station of another RE is at least 12dB or better during a number of consecutive frames

and there is a bearer free on this Base Station, an inter RE handover will be started.

The system status of the other system is lower than the system status of the current system. If,

during a number of consecutive frames, the RE status of the other RE is lower than the RE

status of the current RE, and the best bearer of a Base Station of the other RE is at least 12dB

better and of the current RE no other Base Station is detected and the current Base Station

has no other bearers available, then a location update will be started.

Forced Intra System Handover

If the quality of the traffic bearer becomes unacceptably bad, an immediate attempt to find a

different bearer is started. This may result in a handover.

Forced Inter System Handover

If a good bearer cannot be found within the current RE, alternative systems will be investigated in

the history list. If no RE is found, the Portable Telephone quickly scans its environment to find a

valid bearer. If a bearer is found and the network has not yet cleared the call, the Portable

Telephone continues to scan its environment. If the network has cleared the call, e.g. because the

search took too long, the Portable Telephone will release the call.

2.3

User Functions

The user functions are depending on type of interface between the RE and the connected

Telephone Network, and the features supported by the connected Telephone Network.

2.3.1 DCT1900 Mobility Configuration and E1-CAS Standalone when

connected to a MD110

Calling Party Number (ID)

Calling party number is the extension number shown to the user on a Portable Telephone display

upon receipt of an incoming call and used to identify who is calling. The maximum length equals

24 digits.

Connected Party Number

This feature will enable the PBX to inform the user of the party to which it is connected. The

maximum length is 24 digits. The message can be expected at outgoing call set–up or whenever

the other party changes.

Redirecting Party Number

The same as connected party number, except that it will only be sent when the call is diverted

towards another extension. The maximum length is 24 digits.

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

2-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

System Description, System Overview

Message Waiting Indication

With this feature the PBX will be able to inform the user (on his Portable Telephone display) that

there is a pending message in his/her voicemail box and/or short message list.

Message Waiting Clear

The opposite of message waiting indication. This message will inform the Portable Telephone (on

its display) that there is no longer a message waiting in his/her voicemail box and/or short

message list.

2.3.2 Standalone Digital Line Interface

Note that the following features are supported by the Digital Line Unit (DLU) and can be used by

the Portable Telephone only if supported by the connected PBX.

Multi-line Operation

The Multi-line operation provides the user with up to four line appearances.

Calling Party Number (ID)

Calling party number identification displayed to the user on a Portable Telephone upon receipt of

an incoming call used to identify who is calling. The maximum length equals 24 digits.

Called Party Number

This feature displays the number that the user has connected to after setting up a call. The

maximum length is 24 digits.

Redirecting Party Number

Similar to called party number, except that it will only be sent when the call is diverted towards

another extension. The maximum length is 24 digits.

Connected Party Number

This feature will enable the PBX to inform the user of the party to which number it has actually

connected to, if different than dialed. The maximum length is 24 digits. The message can be

expected at outgoing call set–up or whenever the other party changes.

Message Waiting Indication

With this feature the PBX will be able to inform the user (on his Portable Telephone display) that

there is a pending message in his/her voicemail box and/or short message list.

Message Waiting Clear

The opposite of message waiting indication. This message will inform the Portable Telephone (on

its display) that there is no longer a message waiting in his/her voicemail box and/or short

message list.

Call Transfer

This feature gives the user of the Portable Telephone possibility to transfer an already connected

call, either incoming or outgoing, to another extension or outside telephone number, depending on

the PBX restrictions.

2-12

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Conference Call

The user of the Portable Telephone has possibility to invite other extensions or outside telephone

numbers to join a conference call.

Hold Call

Allows the user of the Portable Telephone to cut voice communication with an ongoing call without

actually disconnecting it.

Reconnect Call

A call that is put on hold by the user of the Portable Telephone can also be resumed from the same

Portable Telephone.

Callback

If the called number is occupied and hard to reach due to busy line, this feature registers the target

extension to automatically call back when it is free.

Cancel Callback

Exits the Callback operation.

2.3.3 Standalone Analog Interface and T1 CAS Digital Interface

Basic signalling such as on-hook, off-hook and ringing are supported.

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

2-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

System Description, System Overview

2-14

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

System Description, Hardware Building Blocks

CHAPTER 3

Hardware Building Blocks

The hardware building blocks of the DCT1900 system are (see Figure 3-1)

Base Stations

Portable Telephones

PWT/PWT(E)

air interface

Covered Area

(Cell)

Portable

Telephone

Base

Station

Radio Exchange

Telephone Network

Fig. 3-1 Basic Parts of a DCT1900 System

3.1

Radio Exchange

The RE interfaces between the PBX/MS and the Base Stations. Incoming and outgoing calls are

routed via the RE.

The RE may be connected to the PBX via an E1 connection, T1 connection, standard analog two–

wire lines or possibly a digital interface. The RE may connect to the MS via an E1 or T1 CCS

interface.

Standard RS232 ports on the cabinet make it possible to connect a personal computer and a

printer or a SMS server (in SA mode) to the system. The personal computer is necessary for

system initialization, system fault tracing, system statistics information retrieval, and Short

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

3-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

System Description, Hardware Building Blocks

Message Service (SMS) source. The printer can print a hardcopy of the system error messages.

In a multiple system configuration, up to 13 RE’s can be cascaded together.

The RE consists of:

–One to four Modular Cabinets. The 10 inch Modular Cabinet contain a MCCB and a

backplane with 9 system board connectors, a rectifier circuit and a DC/DC converter.

–A number of system boards.

The Modular Cabinet requires an external power source of -48Vdc.

3.2

Base Stations

The Base Station enables radio communications between the RE and Portable Telephones.

The Base Station has two main functions:

To modulate a carrier with the digital encoded information (TDMA frame directed to Portable

Telephone),

To demodulate a modulated carrier (TDMA frame received from Portable Telephone).

A Base Station communicates with the RE via two (2B+D) interfaces, requiring two twisted pair

cables. The two 2B channels (256 kbit/s) provide eight 32 kbit/s speech paths between a Base

Station and a RE, enabling a Base Station to handle eight simultaneous calls. In addition to data

communication, these two twisted pairs are also used to distribute power to the Base Stations.

One or two additional pairs can be wired to provide a longer powering distance.

Two methods exist to power Base Stations:

Via local power supply.

Via Modular Cabinet.

With the first method, Base Stations are powered by -48Vdc which is not routed via the cabinet.

The maximum cable length between Base Station and RE is only data limited and may reach up to

11,500 ft.

With the second method, power is distributed via the Modular Cabinet and Base Station cabling.

The cable length between the Base Station and cabinets now depends on the number of twisted

pairs used for power, the type of cable and environmental noise.

The number of Base Stations used in a system depends on the area to be covered and the traffic

density. Typical in–house coverage is a 100-200 ft. radius. The cell size may vary between 40 ft.

indoors and up to 1,000 ft. outdoors.

The air interface conforms to PWT MAC Layer and FCC part 15.

3.3

Portable Telephones

The Portable Telephone (PT) supports the basic functions of a normal wired DTMF–type

telephone. The PT is available in three models: the 9p23, the DT600 and the DT620. Each is

equipped with a 3-line 12 character dot matrix LCD display, backlit illumination keypad and display,

and plastic keypad. See Section 3, "Product Specifications," Chapter 1, "Portable Telephones"

and Chapter 12, "Portable Telephone Accessories" for further information. With the DLU, the 9p23

and DT620 PT will support up to 4 line appearances.

3-2

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

System Description, Radio Exchange Boards

CHAPTER 4

Radio Exchange Boards

4.1

General

The RE can contain the following System Board types:

Central Processing Unit

(CPU

REX-BRD0004)

(CPU2

(SPU-S

(CLU

REX-BRD9033 and REX-BRD9034)

REX-BRD0017)

REX-BRD0014)

Speech Processing Unit

Cell Link Unit

(CLU-S

(SLU

REX-BRD0016)

REX-BRD0015)

Speech Link Unit

Digital Trunk Unit

(DTU E1,CCS REX-BRD0003)

(DTU E1, CAS REX-BRD0002)

(DTU T1, CAS REX-BRD0021)

(DTU T1, CCS REX-BRD0025)

Line Termination Unit

Digital Line Unit

(LTU

(LTU2

REX-BRD0007) (Standalone only)

REXBRD0019A)

(DLU REX-BRD0023) (Standalone only)

The RE consists of up to 4 Modular Cabinets. A Modular Cabinet contains, besides the slots for

the System Boards, a MCCB and if required, a SDB.

4.2

Central Processing Unit - CPU1 (REX-BRD0004 or 2/ROFNB 157 19/2),

CPU2 (REX-BRD9033 or REX-BRD9034)

The Central Processing Unit is responsible for overall control of a DCT1900 system. It contains

two standard I/O ports (RS232) and synchronization ports. One CPU board is required per RE.

The CPU/CPU2 performs the following tasks:

System initialization

Call processing

Intra system mobility management

System testing and fault recovery

System statistics information

PWT air interface synchronization

Short Message Service (SMS) message broadcast

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

4-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

System Description, Radio Exchange Boards

4.3

Speech Link Unit – SLU (REX-BRD0015 or ROFNB 157 16/1)

The SLU is a combination of an SPU and a CLU on one board. It contains eight SPC (see Figure

4-1) and eight CLC (see Figure 4-1).

The SLU can be used to control Base Stations via twisted pair cables up to 1.3 miles. For longer

distances up to 2.2 miles, a CLU must be used with appropriate powering and cable types.

See Paragraphs 4.4 and 4.5 for the description of the SPU and CLU.

SPC

Peripheral

SPC

Peripheral

CLC

Base

Station

Peripheral

Base

Station

CLC

Peripheral

Fig. 4-1 SLU

4-2

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

System Description, Radio Exchange Boards

4.4

Speech Processing Unit - SPU-S (REX-BRD0017 or ROFNB 157 16/3)

The SPU interfaces between a LTU/DTU and a CLU/SLU. Every SPU board contains eight Speech

Processing Channels (SPC, see Figure 4-2). Every SPC handles the speech processing for one

call. When a call is initiated, either by a Portable Telephone or by an incoming call, an SPC is

assigned to the call.

The main functions of the board are:

64 kbit/s PCM to 32 kbit/s ADPCM transcoding and vice versa

DTMF generation and dial tone detection

Echo control

SPC

Peripheral

SPC

Fig.4-2 SPU

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

4-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

System Description, Radio Exchange Boards

4.5

Cell Link Unit - CLU (REX-BRD0014 or ROFNB 157 11/2) or

CLU-S (REX-BRD0016 or ROFNB 157 16/2)

The CLU interfaces between a SPU and a Base Station. Every CLU board contains eight CLC (see

Figure 4-3). Each CLC communicates with one Base Station.

The main functions of the board are:

Provides eight simultaneous speech channels from the RE to a Base Station.

Provides TDMA frame synchronization and power for the Base Stations.

The Base Station control, TDMA frame generation and radio link maintenance functions are

implemented in the Base Station.

For signalling distances up to 2.2 miles, a CLU may be used with appropriate powering and cable

types. For signalling distances up to 1.2 miles, a CLU-S may be used with appropriate powering

and cable types.

CLC

Base

Station

Peripheral

CLC

Base

Station

Peripheral

Fig. 4-3 CLU/CLU-S

4-4

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

System Description, Radio Exchange Boards

4.6

Digital Trunk Unit - DTU-E1

4.6.1 CCS - REX-BRD0003 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/6

The DTU provides the digital interface between the MS and the RE. The physical connection with

the MS is established via twisted pair cables.

Every DTU board contains 2 DTCs (see Figure 4-4), each equipped with identical firmware. Both

DTCs support the Common Channel Signalling (CCS) interface.

Each CCS interface provides 30 (total 60 per board), communication channels to which Portable

Telephones are assigned dynamically. These channels are shared by the Portable Telephones

which means that although the RE can handle more Portable Telephones, only 30 calls per CCS

interface can take place at the same time. The maximum number of Portable Telephones a RE can

handle depends on the GOS (grade of service) and the traffic capacity of the RE configuration.

However, there is a maximum of 60 concurrent off hooks and a maximum of 1 DTU-E1 card per

mobility RE.

DTC2

Channels

31 - 60

2 Mbit/s

Trunk

L2 L1

Channels

1 - 30

2 Mbit/s

Trunk

L2 L1

DTC1

Fig. 4-4 DTU-E1 CCS

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

4-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

System Description, Radio Exchange Boards

4.6.2 CAS - REX-BRD0002 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/1

DTU-E1 CAS is used only in standalone configurations. The DTU provides the digital interface

between the PBX and the RE. The physical connection with the PBX is established via twisted

pair cables.

Every DTU board contains 2 DTCs (see Figure 4-5), each equipped with identical firmware. Both

DTCs support the Channel Associated Signalling (CAS) interface.

Each CAS interface provides 30 (total 60 per board), communication channels to which Portable

Telephones are assigned statically. Each channel is dedicated to a specific Portable Telephone

number. The maximum number of Portable Telephones a RE can handle is 600. This is

supported on 10 DTU E1 CAS cards.

DTC2

Channels

31 - 60

2 Mbit/s

Trunk

L2 L1

Channels

1 - 30

2 Mbit/s

Trunk

L2 L1

DTC1

Fig. 4-5 DTU-E1 -CAS

4-6

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

System Description, Radio Exchange Boards

4.7

Digital Trunk Unit - DTU-T1 CAS (REX-BRD0021 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/2)

DTU T1 CAS is used only in Standalone configurations. The DTU provides the digital interface

between the PBX and the RE. The physical connection with the PBX is established via 100 ohm

twisted pair cables.

Every DTU board contains 2 DTCs (see Figure 4-6), each equipped with identical firmware. Both

DTCs support the Channel Associated Signalling (CAS) interface.

Each CAS interface provides 24 (total 48 per board), communication channels to which Portable

Telephones are assigned individually. Each channel is dedicated to a specific Portable Telephone

number. The maximum number of Portable Telephones a RE can handle is 600. This is

supported on 13 DTU T1 CAS cards.

DTC2

Channels

25 - 48

1.544 Mbit/s

Trunk

Channels

1 - 24

1.544 Mbit/s

Trunk

DTC1

Fig. 4-6 DTU-T1 CAS

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

4-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

System Description, Radio Exchange Boards

4.8

Digital Trunk Unit-DTU-T1 CCS ( REX-BRD0025 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/3 )

The DTU provides the digital interface between the MS and the RE. The physical connection with

the MS is established via 100 ohm twisted pair cables.

Every DTU board contains 2 DTCs (see Figure 4-7), each equipped with identical firmware. Both

DTCs support the Common Channel Signalling (CCS) interface.

Each CCS interface provides 23 (total 46 per board), communication channels to which Portable

Telephones are assigned dynamically. These channels are shared by the Portable Telephones

which means that although the RE can handle more Portable Telephones, only 23 calls per CCS

interface can take place at the same time. However, there is a maximum of 60 concurrent off

hooks and a maximum of 2 DTU-T1 (CCS) cards per mobility RE.

DTC2

Channels

24 - 46

1.544 Mbit/s

Trunk

Channels

1 - 23

1.544 Mbit/s

Trunk

DTC1

Fig. 4-7 DTU-T1 CCS

4-8

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

System Description, Radio Exchange Boards

4.9

Line Termination Unit - LTU (REX-BRD0007 or ROFNB 157 02/6)

LTU2 (REX-BRD0019A or ROFNB 157 25/2)

LTUs are used only in Standalone configurations. The LTU provides the analog interface between

the PBX and the RE. Every LTU board contains 8 Line Termination Circuits (LTC, see Figure 4-8).

An LTC interfaces to the PBX through a two–wire analog subscriber line. Every analog line is

dedicated to a specific Portable Telephone number. The LTC terminates the line to the PBX like an

ordinary wired analog telephone.

The main tasks of the LTU board are:

To establish physical connection between the PBX and RE

On/Off hook detection

Ring signal detection

R–button function handling

Pulse dialing (not currently supported)

Analog to digital speech processing [PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)] and vice versa

Peripheral

Analog

Telephone

Line

LTC

Peripheral

Analog

Telephone

Line

LTC

Fig. 4-8 LTU

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

4-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

System Description, Radio Exchange Boards

4.10 Digital Line Unit - DLU (REX-BRD0023) Basic Board

The Digital Line Unit (DLU) card is used only in standalone configurations. The card provides the

DCT1900 system with the ability to deliver features such as calling party name/number, message

waiting indicator, and multi-line operation to the Portable Telephone.

Each card has 12 Digital Line Circuits (DLC, see Figure 4-9), to support 12 Portable Telephones.

Each line is dedicated to a specific Portable Telephone number.

The DLU is designed to interface with various PBXs, such as Nortel Meridian 1, Nortel Norstar,

Lucent 75 + 85 series, as well as 8400 Definity G1, G2, G3 PBXs.

Line 12

DLC

1:1 Digital line

Line 1

DLC

1:1 Digital line

Fig. 4-9 DLU

4.11

4.12

4.13

Digital Line Unit - DLU (AWS1024) Meridian Board

Digital Line Unit - DLU (AWS1025) Norstar Board

Digital Line Unit - DLU (AWS1026) Lucent Board

4-10

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

System Description, Radio Exchange Boards

4.14 Modular Cabinet Connection Board-MCCB (ROANB 101 28)

The MCCB provides connectors for a personal computer, a printer, 3 DTU E1 boards (coax

connections), Base Station powering, for 7 CLU boards or SLU boards, and a general alarm (via a

relay). The MCCB is located on the bottom plate of the Modular Cabinet.

4.15 Synchronization Distribution Board–SDB (REX-BRD0006 or ROANB 101 38)

The SDB allows the connection of one input and three output synchronization signals to the CPU

via 120 ohm shielded twisted pair cables. It is located on the bottom plate of the Modular Cabinet

near the MCCB. The synchronization signals are required to achieve PWT air interface

synchronization between DCT1900 systems to allow seamless inter system handovers.

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

4-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

System Description, Radio Exchange Boards

Portable Telephones

Base

Station

Base

Station

Remote DC

Power Supply

Base

Station

Powered from

External

Patch

Panel (MDF)

...

SLU

CLU

(8)

CLU

(8)

Power

source

CLU

(8)

General

Alarm

(GA)

SPU

(8)

SPU

(8)

SPU

(8)

CPU

DTU

(2)

DLU

(12)

LTU

(8)

Personal

Radio

Computer

Exchange

Synchronization

distribution board

System

Printer

Digital

E1 or T1 link

Analog

1:1 Digital lines

PWT air interface

synchronization

MCCB

Mobility Server/PBX

SMS Server

Fig. 4-10 Hardware Block Diagram of the DCT1900 System housed in a Modular Cabinet

Note: Numbers in ( ) are circuits per board.

4-12

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

System Description, Other System Aspects

CHAPTER 5

Other System Aspects

5.1

Installation and Maintenance

As each DCT1900 system is configured to meet specific user requirements, the RE must be

assembled on location. The system must be initialized after the physical installation. DCT1900

system initialization, maintenance and updating, and fault finding and repair are accomplished with

the aid of the CSMW Software program running on a personal computer.

Automatic System Maintenance is a built–in feature that will detect, report, isolate, and when

possible, recover the system from errors.

All of the system boards in the RE have a number of light emitting diodes that enable maintenance

personnel to quickly localize a faulty board. This feature is applicable during the power–up phase

and operational use of the system.

5.2

5.3

Statistics

The CSMW software is capable of collecting statistical information. During operational use of the

DCT1900 system, useful information can be registered. This information can consist of the total

call time of all Portable Telephones per hour during a day or a period of days, highest number of

simultaneous calls, call duration per user, distribution of calls according to the call length, load of

Base Stations, status information of a call, handovers, etc. All this information is useful to analyze

the performance of the DCT1900 system.

Capacity

5.3.1 Physical Limitations of the System Housed in the Modular Cabinet

Modular Cabinets per DCT1900 system

System boards per Modular Cabinet

Modular Cabinet Connection boards per Modular Cabinet

Synchronization Distribution Board per system

: 4

: 9

: 1

5.3.2 Traffic Limitations of the System

A system can handle a maximum of 60 simultaneous calls or 44.8 Erlang with a GOS of 0.5%.

Each Base Station can handle a maximum of 8 simultaneous calls or 2.7 Erlang with a GOS of

0.5%.

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

5-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

System Description, Other System Aspects

5.3.3 Characteristics

Frequency band

Number of carriers

Carrier spacing

Transmission

: 1920-1930 MHz

: 8 adjacent

: 1.25 MHz in 1920-1930 MHz band;

: MC/TDMA/TDD (Multiple Carrier/ Time–Division Multiple Access/

Time–Division Duplexing)

: 10 ms

TDMA frame

TDMA slot

: 0.417 ms

No. of slots per frame

: 24 (12 full duplex channels)

Total number of channels : 96 (88 available for speech)

Bit rate

: 1152 kbit/s

Speech coding

Modulation

: 32 kbit/s ADPCM (Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation)

: π /4 DQPSK (Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) with RRC

^{baseband filtering with 50% bandwidth expansion (}∝ =0.5)

5-2

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

System Description, Other System Aspects

5.4

Numbering Conventions

Figures 5-1 and 5-2 show how cabinets, boards, peripherals, CLCs, LTCs and DTCs are

numbered. The cabinet containing the CPU board is defined as Cabinet 1.

Modular Cabinet

number - option 1

Cabinet with CPU board

Modular Cabinet

number - option 2

Cabinet with CPU board

Fig.5-1 Modular Cabinet Numbering

Cabinet

Peripheral 8

DTC 2,

(CLC 8)

Channel 25-48(31-60)

Peripheral 8

(LTC 8)

Peripheral 1

(CLC 1)

DTC 1,

Peripheral 1

(LTC 1)

Channel 1 - 24(1-30)

24 28 32

Board number

52 56

Fig. 5-2 Board, Circuit and Channel Numbering

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

5-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

System Description, Other System Aspects

Base Station Numbering

Base Stations are identified by hexadecimal numbers 08-FF which are referred to as Base Station

numbers or Base Station identities. A range of eight hexadecimal numbers is assigned to the

CLCs of a SLU/CLU when you add the first Base Station to it by means of the CSM software

command Base Station–Add. When you add the first Base Station to another SLU/CLU the next

free eight hexadecimal numbers are assigned to its CLCs. The first SLU/CLU receives 08-0F, the

next SLU/CLU that has a Base Station added will be 10-17. The Base Station assigns Base

Station numbers according to the CLC it is physically connected to. CLC 1 correlates to Base

Station number 08, or 10, etc.

The hexadecimal numbers 00 to 07 are not used. Therefore the hexadecimal numbers 08 to 0F

will be assigned to the first SLU/CLU used to add the first Base Station. Base Station numbering is

08-FF.

Given below is an example:

1. When you define the first Base Station of the first SLU/CLU, its CLCs (1 to 8) will get Base

Station numbers 08 to 0F (hexadecimal).

2. When you define the first Base Station of the second SLU/CLU, its CLCs (1 to 8) will get Base

Station numbers 10 to 17 (hexadecimal).

3. When you define the first Base Station of the third SLU/CLU, its CLCs (1 to 8) will get Base

Station numbers 18 to 1F, etc.

If a SLU/CLU board is removed by the CSMW "Remove Board" command, a gap of 8 Base Station

numbers may arise. When there is a gap in the numbering, and the first Base station is added to

another SLU/CLU, the numbering system described above is used; the numbers in the gap are not

used. If in such a situation all Base Station numbers are used (08 – FF), the Base Station numbers

of the oldest ”gap” are used.

Note that if there are gaps in the Base Station numbers, the Base Station numbers will shift after a

system reset. If, for example, the second SLU/CLU is removed, then after a system reset the

numbers are:

The CLCs of the first SLU/CLU still have Base Station numbers 08 to 0F

The CLCs of the third SLU/CLU now have Base Station numbers 10 to 17, etc.

5-4

System-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications

Section 3

Product Specifications

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Table of Contents

Table of Contents

CHAPTER 1

Portable Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.6

1.7

1.8

DT600 Portable Telephone - KRC 101 1372 (no antenna), DARLA (Discontinued). . . . . . . . 1-1

DT620 Portable Telephone - KRC 101 1374 (no antenna), DIXIE (Discontinued) . . . . . . . . . 1-2

9p23 Portable Telephone - Messenger - 9p23-AAB4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

9p23 Portable Telephone - Medic - 9p23-BAB4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

9p23 Portable Telephone - (Mark II) - Medic - 9p23-DAB4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4

9p23 Portable Telephone - (Mark II) Messenger - 9p23 CAB4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4

9p23 Programmer Set - 641302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

DT620 Programmer Set - NTM 201 2180 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

CHAPTER 2

Base Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1

Base Station - KRC 101 1371 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Straight Antenna - KRE 101 1733/55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Right Angle Antenna - KRE 101 1750/55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Mounting Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Outdoor/Wall Mounting Kit - NTM 201 1718 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Indoor/Ceiling Mounting Kit - NTM 201 1754 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Adapter Mounting Plate Kit - NTM 201 1847. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

2.2

2.3

2.4

2.4.1

2.4.2

2.4.3

CHAPTER 3

Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1

Batteries for the DT600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

High Capacity NiMH - BKB 193 1021 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Vibrating Battery, NiMH - BKB 191 312 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Batteries for the DT620 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

High Capacity NiMH Battery - BKB 193 104/75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Ultra-Slim Line NiMH Battery - BKB 193 105/75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Batteries for the 9p23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Messenger Battery - 643100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Messenger Battery with headset connection- 643101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Medic Battery - 643102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Medic Battery with headset connection- 643103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

3.1.1

3.1.2

3.2

3.2.1

3.2.2

3.3

3.3.1

3.3.2

3.3.3

3.3.4

CHAPTER 4

Chargers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1

Chargers for the DT600. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Desk Multi-Charger Kit - NTM 201 2022 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1.1

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Table of Contents

4.1.2

4.1.3

4.1.4

4.2

Rapid Battery Charger Kit - BML 162 1016/72 Discontinued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Rapid Desk Charger - BML 162 1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Rack Charger Kit - NTM 201 2057 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Chargers for the DT620. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Rapid Charger - BML 162 098 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Desktop Charging Cradle - BML 162 112/04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Rack Charger Kit - NTM 201 2512 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Docking Station - DPY 901 034. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Chargers for the 9p23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

9p23 Messenger Desktop Charger - 641303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

9p23 Medic Desktop Charger - 641304 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

9p23 Non-Modular Rack Charger - AWS1068 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

9p23 Modular Rack Charger US Power Module - 641300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

9p23 Modular Rack Charger 4 Slot Charging Module - RC23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

4.2.1

4.2.2

4.2.3

4.2.4

4.3

4.3.1

4.3.2

4.3.3

4.3.4

4.3.5

CHAPTER 5

Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.1

5.2

5.3

5.4

5.5

Modular Cabinet - REX-BAS9021 or BDVNB 101 01/2 or BDVNB 101 01/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Modular Cabinet Backplane - ROANB 101 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Modular Cabinet Connection Board, MCCB - ROANB 101 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Synchronization Distribution Board, SDB -REX-BRD0006 or ROANB 101 38 . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Installation Set Sync Port CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

CHAPTER 6

System Boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.1

6.2

Digital Trunk Unit (DTU–E1 CAS, CCS) - REX-BRD0002 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/1 . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Digital Trunk Unit, DTU-T1, CAS - REX-BRD0021 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Digital Trunk Unit -DTU–T1,CCS - REX-BRD0021 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Central Processing Unit (CPU1) - REX-BRD0004 or 2/ROFNB 157 19/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Central Processing Unit (CPU2) - REX-BRD9033, REX-BRD9034 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3

Speech Link Unit, SLU - REX-BRD0015 or ROFNB 157 16/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Speech Processing Unit, SPU-S - REX-BRD0017 or ROFNB 157 16/3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Cell Link Unit, CLU - REX-BRD0014 or ROFNB 157 11/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Cell Link Unit, CLU-S - REX-BRD0016 or ROFNB 157 16/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Line Termination Unit, LTU - REX-BRD0007 or ROFNB 157 02/06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Line Termination Unit, LTU2 - REX-BRD0019A or ROFNB 157 25/2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.8

Digital Line Unit, DLU - REX-BRD0023, AWS1024 Meridian, AWS1025 Nostar,

6.3

6.4

6.5

6.6

6.7

6.8

6.9

6.10

6.11

6.12

AWS1026-Lucent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Table of Contents

CHAPTER 7

Firmware (on EPROM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.1

CPU DCT1900 Firmware (Mobility) - RYS 105 447. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

CPU DCT1900 Firmware (Standalone) - RYS 105 657. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

DTU–E1 CCS Firmware Set - NTM/RYSNB 101 17/3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

DTU–E1 CAS Firmware Set - RYS 105 664 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

DTU-T1 CCS Firmware - RYS 105 650. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

DTU-T1 CAS Firmware Set - RYS 105 660 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

SLU Firmware - RYS 105 446; RYSNB 101 19; RYSNB 101 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

SPU-S Firmware - RYSNB 101 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

SPU-S DSP Firmware - REX-SW0013 or RYS 105 446 (m-Law); RYSNB 101 22/1 (A-Law) 7-1

CLU Firmware - RYT/ROFNB 157 11/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

CLU-S Firmware - RYSNB 101 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

LTU Firmware - REX-SW0012 or RYS 105 661 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

LTU2 Firmware - REX-LTU2FW01/1H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2

7.2

7.3

7.4

7.5

7.6

7.7

7.8

7.9

7.10

7.11

7.12

7.13

CHAPTER 8

Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8.1

8.2

8.3

8.4

8.5

Modular Power Supply Kit - AWS 1071 (300W) New. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Modular Power Supply Kit - NTM 201 1786 (300W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Modular Power Supply Kit - NTM 201 1752 (200W) Discontinued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Remote Base Station Power Supply Kit - NTM 201 1785. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Remote Base Station Plug-In Power Supply - BML 161 139 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

CHAPTER 9

Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

9.1

Cables for Modular Cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

CHAPTER 10

Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

10.1

10.2

10.3

10.4

CSMW Software Kit, UTAM - REX-MTC9023. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

CSMW Software Kit, International - REX-MTC9022 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Feature and Phonebook Download Tool - AWS1092 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Site Survey Tool Configuration Manager - LZY 213 1104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

CHAPTER 11

Accessories-Portable Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

11.1

11.2

11.3

Accessories for the DT600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Accessories for the DT620 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Accessories for the 9p23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

III

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Table of Contents

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Portable Telephones

CHAPTER 1

Portable Telephones

1.1

DT600 Portable Telephone - KRC 101 1372 (no antenna), DARLA

(Discontinued)

Compliance to Regulations and Standards

Safety Standards

ANSI Standards

PWT Standards

PWT(E) Standards

UTAM Standards

Emissions Standards

: UL 1950

: C63.17

: PWT 2, 3

: Interoperability

: Disablement Test Suite and Location Verification Procedure

: FCC Part 15

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

: 14 to 131°F (-10 to 55°C)

Storage

: -4 to 158°F (-20 to 70°C)

Relative humidity

Operating

: 15 to 95%, non condensing

: 5 to 95%, non condensing

Storage

Not waterproof

General Specifications

Size

: 5.7" x 2.1" x 1" (145 x 53 x 25mm)

Weight

: 6 oz. (170.4g)

Material housing

Color

: PC/ABS

: black

External contacts

: for Portable initialization and downloading, monitor function of

Desk Charger and Battery Pack charging

Transmitter Radio Specifications

RF carriers

Unlicensed:

Fc(MHz) = F2 - C x 1.25MHz, Where C = 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7

F2 = 1.929375GHz

Frequency band

Modulation method

Power spectrum

Peak output power

Output Spurious

Harmonics

: 1910 to 1930 MHz

: π/4 DQPSK

: π/4 DQPSK, ∝ = 0.5 RRC

: 3 to 19.5 dBm

: as per ANSI C63.17 and ANSI C63.4

Receiver Radio Specifications

Receiver sensitivity

: typical -93 dBm and a minimum receiver sensitivity of -90 dBm

with a B.E.R. of .001

Unwanted emissions

: as per PWT Standards

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

1-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Portable Telephones

User Interface

Ringer volume levels

Display

Top indicator

Keypad

: 12

: LCD, 12 active dot matrix, backlit

: LED (red/green) for status indication

: 17 hard keys, backlit

: 2 side volume keys

Volume control

Number memory

: approx. 600 entries

Ringer Output

Sound output level

: 85 ± 5dB(A) at 10 cm

1.2

DT620 Portable Telephone - KRC 101 1374 (no antenna), DIXIE

(Discontinued)

Compliance to Regulations and Standards

Safety Standards

ANSI Standards

PWT Standards

: UL 1950

: C63.17

: PWT 2, 3

PWT(E) Standards

UTAM Standards

Emissions Standards

: Interoperability

: Disablement Test Suite and Location Verification Procedure

: FCC Part 15

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

: 14 to 131°F (-10 to 55°C)

Storage

: -4 to 158°F (-20 to 70°C)

Relative humidity

Operating

: 15 to 95%, non condensing

: 5 to 95%, non condensing

Storage

Not waterproof

General Specifications

Size

: 5.7" x 2" x 1" (145 x 53 x 25mm)

Weight

: 6 oz. (170.4g)

Material housing

Color

: PC/ABS

: black

External contacts

: for Portable initialization and downloading, monitor function of

Desk Charger and Battery Pack charging

Transmitter Radio Specifications

RF carriers

Unlicensed:

Fc(MHz) = F2 - C x 1.25MHz, Where C = 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7

F2 = 1.929375GHz

Frequency band

Modulation method

Power spectrum

Peak output power

Output Spurious

Harmonics

: 1910 to 1930 MHz

: π/4 DQPSK

: π/4 DQPSK, ∝ = 0.5 RRC

: 3 to 19.5 dBm

: as per ANSI C63.17 and ANSI C63.4

Receiver Radio Specifications

1-2

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Portable Telephones

Receiver sensitivity

Unwanted emissions

: typical -93 dBm and a minimum receiver sensitivity of -90 dBm

with a B.E.R. of .001

: as per PWT Standards

User Interface

Ringer volume levels

Display

Top indicator

Keypad

: 12

: LCD, 12 active dot matrix, backlit

: LED (red/green) for status indication

: 17 hard keys, backlit

: 2 side volume keys

Volume control

Number memory

: approx. 600 entries

Ringer Output

Sound output level

: 85 ± 5dB(A) at 10 cm

1.3

9p23 Portable Telephone - Messenger - 9p23-AAB4

Compliance to Regulations and Standards

ANSI Standards

PWT Standards

: C63.17

: PWT 2, 3

PWT(E) Standards

UTAM Standards

Safety Standards

Emissions Standards

: Interoperability

: Disablement Test Suite and Location Verification Procedure

: UL60950

: FCC Part 15

General Specifications

Size

Weight

: 5.6" x 2" x .825" (142 x 51 x 21mm)

: 6.8 oz. (193g)

Display

Enclosure protection

Free fall test

: Graphic 40 x 121 pixels LCD, backlight

: IP54-Classified

: IESC 68-2-32 procedure 1

Dropped 12 times from 1m

Color

: black/light gray

External contacts

Internal contacts:

: for monitor function of Desk Charger and Battery Pack charging

: for Portable initialization and downloading

Transmitter Radio Specifications

RF carriers

Unlicensed:

Fc(MHz) = F2 - C x 1.25MHz, Where C = 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7

F2 = 1.929375GHz

: 1910 to 1930 MHz

: π/4 DQPSK

: π/4 DQPSK, ∝ = 0.5 RRC

: 3 or 19.5 dBm

Frequency band

Modulation method

Power spectrum

Peak output power

Output Spurious

Harmonics

: as per ANSI C63.17

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

1-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Portable Telephones

Receiver Radio Specifications

Receiver sensitivity

: typical -93 dBm and a minimum receiver sensitivity of -90 dBm

with a B.E.R. of .001

Unwanted emissions

: as per PWT Standards

User Interface

Ringer volume levels

Display

Top indicator

Keypad

: 10

: Graphic 40 x 121 pixels LCD, backlight

: LED (red/green) for status indication

: 19 hard keys

Volume control

Alarm control

Number memory

Mute key

: 2 side volume keys

: 1 top key

: approx. 1000 entries

: 1 side key

Ringer Output

Sound output level

: 85 ± 5dB(A) at 10 cm

1.4

9p23 Portable Telephone - Medic - 9p23-BAB4

Same as specifications for the 9p23 Messenger except Medic color is light gray/blue.

1.5

1.6

1.7

9p23 Portable Telephone (Mark II) - Medic - 9p23-DAB4

Same as specifications for the 9p23 Messenger except Medic color is light gray/blue.

9p23 Portable Telephone (Mark II) - Messenger - 9p23-CAB4

Same as specifications for the 9p23 Messenger.

9p23 Programmer Set - 641302

The 9p23 Portable Telephone Programmer Set is required to program/activate the 9p23 Portable

Telephones onto the DCT1900 Standalone RE and to the MS. This Programmer is also used to

load software, custom phone books and PBX function data into Portable Telephones.

1.8

DT620 Programmer Set - NTM 201 2180

The DT620 Portable Telephone Programmer Set is required to program/activate the DT620

Portable Telephone onto the DCT1900 Standalone RE and to the MS. This is also used to

download software, custom phone books and PBX function data into Portable Telephones.

1-4

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Base Stations

CHAPTER 2

Base Stations

2.1

Base Station - KRC 101 1371

**To order a complete Base Station, use Part Number: DB600-001**

Compliance to Regulations and Standards

PWT standard

PWT(E) standard

ANSI standard

: Parts 6,7,10

: Interoperability standard

: C63.17

UTAM standard

Safety Standard

Emissions Standard

: LVP

: UL60950

: FCC parts 15

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

: -31 to 169°F (-35 to 76°C)

: -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C)

Storage

Relative humidity

Operating

: 15 to 90%, non condensing

: 5 to 95%, non condensing

Storage

General Specifications

Powering method

: Centrally from the Radio Exchange, or using 48V external

power supply or a DC adapter

Size

Weight

: 7.875" x 6.5”"x 1.97" (200 x 165 x 50mm)

: 1lb. 2.5oz. (525g)

Material Cover

Color Cover

Operating voltage

Power Consumption

: ABS molded plastic

: light beige (NCS 1502–B)

: 21 to 56 Vdc

: maximum power consumption shall be less than 6W

Transmitter Radio Specifications

All specifications mentioned here are measured at the RF connectors located next to the

antennas.

RF carriers

Unlicensed:

Fc(MHz) = F2 - C x 1.25MHz, Where C = 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7

F2 = 1.929375GHz

Frequency band

Center frequency stability

Modulation method

Power spectrum

Peak output power at

RF–connector

: 1850 to 1990 MHz

: "10 ppm (crystal controlled)

: π/4 DQPSK

: π/4 DQPSK β/∝ = 0.5 RCC1

: 3 to 19.5 dBm

Output Spurious

Harmonics

: as per ANSI C63.17 and ANSI C63.4

as per ANSI C63.17 and ANSI C63.4

Typical RF output impedance : 50

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

2-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Base Stations

Receiver Radio Specifications

All specifications mentioned here are measured on the RF connector.

-3

Receiver sensitivity

Input compression

Maximum input level

Typical C/I ratio

Typical C/N ratio

Unwanted emissions

: typical -92 dBm with a B.E.R. = 10 at the radio interface

: better than -30 dBm at -1 dB compression point

: as per PWT

Base Station Cable

Signal and power transport

Express power transport

Maximum length

: 2 unshielded twisted pairs

: 1 optional unshielded pair (should be twisted)

: see Tables 2–1 and 2–2.

Cable

Maximum cable length

Type

Wire size (Æ)

Capacitance

Superimposed noise

AWG

8 mV/pHz

10 mV/pHz

CLU 11/2

SLU/CLU-S

CLU 11/2

SLU/CLU

Twisted pair

26ga

24ga

22ga

15 pF/ft.

40 pF/ft.

7540 ft.

4920 ft.

6560 ft.

4260 ft.

11480 ft.

6880 ft.

6160 ft.

6880 ft.

4260 ft.

3930 ft.

9840 ft.

5900 ft.

4920 ft.

6230 ft.

3930 ft.

3280 ft.

Double twisted pair

(J–Y (St)Y 2 2 0.6)

Table 2–1 Maximum Cable Length for Locally Powered Base Stations

Maximum Cable Length (feet)

Wire size

Power Supply Voltage

27.5 V

Power Supply Voltage

42 V

Power Supply Voltage

48 V

(∅)

0 EPP

418

1 EPP

627

0 EPP

1405

1 EPP

2107

0 EPP

1842

1 EPP

2763

26 awg

24 awg

22 awg

627

941

2107

3161

2763

4145*

6782*

1026

1539

3448*

5172*

4522*

* Cable lengths should never exceed the values given in table 2–1, because of data limitations

Table 2–2 Maximum Cable Length for Centrally Powered Base Stations

2-2

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Base Stations

2.2

Straight Antenna - KRE 101 1733/55

This is a half-wave, dipole antenna . This antenna is removable, plug-in type with a polarized MCX

(OSX) mating interface.

Tolerances

: .XX .02

: .XXX

.010

: Angular 2°

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

: -40 to 176°F (-40 to 80°C)

General Specifications

Impedance

: 50 ohm

Frequency Range

VSWR

: 1850 - 1990 MHz

: 2:1

Power Handling-Average

Power Handling-Peak

Gain-Free Space

Color

: 1 W CW

: 3 W CW

: 1.9 - 3.0 dBi

: Similar to GE Cyclolac S157, color # 863405, NCS S 2005-

Y20R

2.3

Right Angle Antenna - KRE 101 1750/55

This is a half-wave, dipole antenna. This antenna is removable, plug-in type with a polarized MCX

(OSX) mating interface.

Tolerances

: .XX .02

: .XXX

.010

: Angular 2°

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

: -40 to 176°F (-40 to 80°C)

General Specifications

Impedance

: 50 ohm

Frequency Range

VSWR

: 1850 - 1990 MHz

: 2:1

Power Handling-Average

Power Handling-Peak

Gain-Free Space

Color

: 1 W CW

: 3 W CW

: 1.9 - 3.0 dBi

: Similar to GE Cyclolac S157, color # 863405, NCS S 2005-

Y20R

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

2-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Base Stations

2.4

Mounting Kits

2.4.1 Outdoor/Wall Mounting Kit - NTM 201 1718

DCT1900 Base Stations may be mounted in a weatherproof fiberglass housing. The housing is

designed for pole or wall-mounting commercial electronic and telephone equipment in outdoor

areas, as well as indoor industrial applications where chemical vapors and/or high dust

contamination exists. See Section 5, Installation Instructions, Chapter 16, Base Station,

Paragraph 16.7 for mounting instructions.

2.4.2 Indoor/Ceiling Mounting Kit - NTM 201 1754

DCT1900 Base Stations may be mounted on a ceiling. This kit is designed to secure the Base

Station on the ceiling. See Section 5, Installation Instructions, Chapter 16, Base Station,

Paragraph 16.6.1 and 16.6.2 for mounting instructions.

2.4.3 Adapter Mounting Plate Kit - NTM 201 1847

DCT1900 Base Stations may be mounted on a wall. This kit is designed to secure the Base

Station on the wall when replacing DCT900 or DCT1800 Base Stations.

2-4

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Batteries

CHAPTER 3

Batteries

3.1

Batteries for the DT600

3.1.1 High Capacity NiMH - BKB 193 1021

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

: 32 to 113°F (0 to 45°C)

: -4 to 113°F (-20 to 45°C)

General Specifications

Size

: 1.81" x .79" x 4.33" (45.97 x 20.07 x 109.98mm)

Weight

Material housing

Color

Type

Voltage

: 5.96 oz. (169.26g)

: PC/ABS

: Black (NCS-9500)

: Re-chargeable Nickel Metal Hydride pack

: 6V

Capacity

Talk Time

Standby Time

: 1200mAH @68 °F 5°F

: 11 hours

: 22 hours

3.1.2 Vibrating Battery, NiMH - BKB 191 312

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Discharging

: 32 to 113°F (0 to 45°C)

: -6 to 113°F (-21 to 45°C)

: -4 to 169°F (-20 to 76°C)

General Specifications

Size

: 1.81" x .51" x 4.33" (45.97 x 12.95 x 109.98mm)

Weight

Material housing

Color

Type

Voltage

: 3.95 oz. (112.18g)

: PC/ABS

: Black (NCS-9500)

: Re-chargeable Nickel Metal Hydride pack

: 6V

Capacity

Talk Time

Standby Time

: 500mAH @68 °F 9°F

: 5 hours

: 10 hours

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

3-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Batteries

3.2

Batteries for the DT620

3.2.1 High Capacity NiMH Battery - BKB 193 104/75

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Discharging

: 32 to 113°F (0 to 45°C)

: -6 to 113°F (-21 to 45°C)

: -4 to 169°F (-20 to 76°C)

General Specifications

Size

: 4.38" x 1.81" x .68" (111.3 x 46 x 17.3mm)

Weight

Material housing

Color

: 4 oz. (113.6g)

: PC/ABS

: Black

Type

: NiMH

Voltage

Capacity

Talk Time

Standby Time

: 4.2 - 5.8V

: 1200 mAH

: 11 hours

: 45 hours

3.2.2 Ultra-Slim Line NiMH Battery - BKB 193 105/75

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Discharging

: 32 to 113°F (0 to 45°C)

: -6 to 113°F (-21 to 45°C)

: -4 to 169°F (-20 to 76°C)

General Specifications

Size

: 4.39" x 1.81" x .35" (111.4 x 46 x 8.9mm)

Weight

Material housing

Color

: 3 oz. (85.2g)

: PC/ABS

: Black

Type

: NiMH

Voltage

Capacity

Talk Time

Standby Time

: 4.2 - 5.8V

: 880 mAH

: 10 hours

: 34 hours

3-2

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Batteries

3.3

Batteries for the 9p23

3.3.1 Messenger Battery - 643100

General Specifications

Weight

: 2.7 oz. (76.5 g)

Material housing

Color

: PC/ABS

: Black

Type

: NiMH

Voltage

: 3.6V (nominal)

: 900 mAH

: 12 hours

: 35 hours

Capacity

Talk Time

Standby Time

Environmental

Operating temperature

Storage temperature

: 14°F to +131°F (-10°C to 55°C)

: -4°F to +158°F (-20°C to +70°C)

3.3.2 Messenger Battery with headset connection- 643101

Weight

Material housing

Color

: 2.7 oz. (76.5 g)

: PC/ABS

: Black

Type

: NiMH

Voltage

: 3.6V (nominal)

: 900 mAH

: 12 hours

: 35 hours

Capacity

Talk Time

Standby Time

Environmental

Operating temperature

Storage temperature

: 14°F to +131°F (-10°C to 55°C)

: -4°F to +158°F (-20°C to +70°C)

3.3.3 Medic Battery - 643102

Weight

Material housing

Color

: 2.7oz. (76.5 g)

: PC/ABS

: Light Gray

: NiMH

Type

Voltage

: 3.6V (nominal)

: 900 mAH

: 12 hours

Capacity

Talk Time

Standby Time

: 35 hours

Environmental

Operating temperature

Storage temperature

: 14°F to +131°F (-10°C to 55°C)

: -4°F to +158°F (-20°C to +70°C)

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

3-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Batteries

3.3.4 Medic Battery with headset connection- 643103

Weight

Material housing

Color

: 2.7 oz. (76.5 g)

: PC/ABS

: Light Gray

: NiMH

Type

Voltage

: 3.6V (nominal)

: 900 mAH

: 12 hours

Capacity

Talk Time

Standby Time

: 35 hours

Environmental

Operating temperature

Storage temperature

: 14°F to +131°F (-10°C to 55°C)

: -4°F to +158°F (-20°C to +70°C)

3-4

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Chargers

CHAPTER 4

Chargers

4.1

Chargers for the DT600

4.1.1 Desk Multi-Charger Kit - NTM 201 2022

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Relative humidity

: 23 to 104°F (-5 to 40°C)

: -4 to 113°F (-20 to 45°C)

: 20 to 80%, non condensing

General Specifications

Size

: 6.73" x 2.68" x 1.18" (170.9 x 68 x 29.97mm)

Weight

: 6.71 oz. (190.56g)

Material housing

Color

: PC/ABS

: Black (NCS-9500)

Powering

: No AC/DC converter is necessary as voltage adaption is done

inside the charger.

: 4dB

RLR

Input Voltage

Charging Time

Front

: 100-240VAC, 50-60Hz

: 1 hr. for light NiMH, 2 hrs. for high capacity NiMH

: 1.5 hr. for light NiMH, 3 hrs. for high capacity NiMH

Back

4.1.2 Rapid Battery Charger Kit - BML 162 1016/72 Discontinued

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Relative humidity

: 32 to 104°F (0 to 40°C)

: -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C)

: 20 to 80%, non condensing

General Specifications

Length x width x height

Weight

: 5.2" x 2" x 1" (132.08 x 50.8 x 25.4mm)

: 3.5 oz. (994g)

Material housing

Color

: PC/ABS

: Black

Powering

: AC/DC converter, 115V

Indicators

: 4dB

Charging Time

: 1 hr. for light NiMH, 3 hrs. for high capacity NiMH

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

4-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Chargers

4.1.3 Rapid Desk Charger - BML 162 1001

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Relative humidity

: -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C)

: 90 to 95% -/+ RH

General Specifications

Length x width x height

Weight

Material housing

Color

: 2.87" x 1.38" x 2.05" (72.9 x 35.05 x 52.07mm)

: 5.4 oz. (153.36g)

: PC/ABS

: Black

Powering

Charging Current

Charging Time

: 115 VAC, 60Hz 5%

: 750mA

: 1 hr., 9 min.

4.1.4 Rack Charger Kit - NTM 201 2057

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Relative humidity

: 23-104°F (-5 to 40°C)

: -4 to 158°F (-20 to 70°C)

: 20 to 80%, non condensing

General Specifications

Length x width x height

Weight

: 12.72" x 6.69" x 1.22" (323 x 170 x 31mm)

: 1 lb., 2 oz. (511g)

Material housing

Color

: PC/ABS

: Black

Powering

Charging Current

Charging Time

: 120 VAC, 60Hz, AC power cord

: 450-550mA

: 1.5 hrs. for light NiMH, 3 hrs. for high capacity NiMH

4.2

Chargers for the DT620

4.2.1 Rapid Charger - BML 162 098

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Relative humidity

: 23 to 131°F (-5 to 55°C)

: -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C)

: 93%

General Specifications

Length x width x height

Weight

: 2.09" x 1.93" x 3.15" (53 x 49 x 80mm)

: 14.6 oz. (415g)

Material housing

Color

: PC/ABS

: Black

Powering

: 115V, 50Hz +/-5%

Charging Current

Charging Time

: 700mA

: 2 hrs. for ultra slim and slim NiMH, 3.5 hrs. for high cap NiMH

4-2

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Chargers

4.2.2 Desktop Charging Cradle - BML 162 112/04

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Relative humidity

: 23 to 131°F (-5 to 55°C)

: -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C)

: 93%

General Specifications

Length x width x height

Weight

Material housing

Color

: 5" x 2.64" x 1.62" (127.2 x 69 x 41mm)

: 5 oz. (142g)

: ABS

: Black

Powering

: 6Vdc

Charging Current

Charging Time

Front

: 400-600mA

: 1.5 hrs. for slim NiMH, 2 hrs. for ultra slim and high cap NiMH

: 30 min. for slim and ultra slim NiMH, 2 hrs. for high cap NiMH

Back

4.2.3 Rack Charger Kit - NTM 201 2512

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Relative humidity

: 23 to 104" (-5 to 40°C)

: -4 to 158°F (-20 to 70°C)

: 20 to 80%, non condensing

General Specifications

Length x width x height

Weight

: 12.72" x 6.69" x 1.22" (323 x 170 x 31mm)

: 1 lb., 2 oz. (511g)

Material housing

Color

: PC/ABS

: Black

Powering

Charging Current

Charging Time

: 120 VAC, 60Hz, AC power cord

: 450-550mA

: 1.5 hrs for slim NiMH, 3 hrs. for high capacity NiMH

4.2.4 Docking Station - DPY 901 034

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Relative humidity

: 41 to 122°F (5 to 50°C)

: 5 to 90%, non condensing

General Specifications

Length x width x height

Weight

Material housing

Color

: 5.9" x 5.5" x 2.36" (150 x 140 x 60mm)

: 12.32 oz. (350g)

: ABS

: Black

Powering

Charging Current

Charging Time

: 5-6Vdc

: 600mA

: 2 hrs.

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

4-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Chargers

4.3

Chargers for the 9p23

4.3.1 9p23 Messenger Desktop Charger - 641303

Dimensions (L x H x D)

Weight

Color

: 4" x 3" x 2.5" (109 x 76 x 69 mm)

: 3.7 onces

: Grey

Case

: PC/ABS

Operating temperature

Power supply

Charging time

: 50°F to + 104°F

: 110 V/ 9 -12 V, 0.4 A

: 2 h

4.3.2 9p23 Medic Desktop Charger - 641304

Dimensions (L x H x D)

Weight

Color

: 4" x 3" x 2.5" (109 x 76 x 69 mm)

: 3.7 onces

: White

Case

: PC/ABS

Operating temperature

Power supply

Charging time

: 50°F to + 104°F

: 110 V/ 9 -12 V, 0.4 A

: 2 h

4.3.3 9p23 Non-Modular Rack Charger - AWS1068

Dimensions (L x H x D)

Weight

: 7" x 7" x 2.5" (184 x 184 x 62 mm)

: 30 onces

Case

: PC/ABS, light grey

: 32°F to + 104°F

: 85% (non condensing)

: 100-250 V AC (47-63 Hz)

: max 8 A

Operating temperature

Maximum relative humidity

Supply voltage

Output current

Charging time

: 1 h for 750mAh cells

4.3.4 9p23 Modular Rack Charger US Power Module - 641300

Dimensions (L x H x D)

Weight

: 7" x 7" x 2.5" (184 x 184 x 62 mm)

: 30 onces

Case

: PC/ABS, light grey

: 32°F to + 104°F

: 85% (non condensing)

: 100-250 V AC (47-63 Hz)

: max 8 A

Operating temperature

Maximum relative humidity

Supply voltage

Output current

4-4

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Chargers

4.3.5 9p23 Modular Rack Charger 4 Slot Charging Module - RC23

Dimensions (L x H x D)

Weight

: 7" x 7" x 2.5" (184 x 184 x 62 mm)

: 30 onces

Case

: PC/ABS, light grey

: 32°F to + 104°F

: 85% (non condensing)

: 100-250 V AC (47-63 Hz)

: max 8 A

Operating temperature

Maximum relative humidity

Supply voltage

Output current

Charging time

: 1 h for 750mAh cells

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

4-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Chargers

4-6

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Cabinets

CHAPTER 5

Cabinets

5.1

Modular Cabinet - REX-BAS9021 or BDVNB 101 01/2 or BDVNB 101 01/3

Compliance to Regulations and Standards

Revisions R2 and R3 of the Modular Cabinet comply with the following regulations and standards:

Safety Standard

EMC Standards

: UL 60950

: FCC, Part 15, Class A

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Relative humidity

: 32 to 104°F (0 to 40°C)

: -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C)

: 10 to 95%, non condensing

General Specifications

Size

Weight

: 10.08" x 11.85" x 17.01" (256 x 301 x 432mm)

: 20.50 lbs. (9307g)

Housing material

Color of cabinet

Color of bottom drawer

Application information

Enclosure Class

Number of System Boards

: zinc plated steel sheet

: coral white (NCS 1002–R)

: green (NCS 5020–B30G)

: for indoor use, wall mounted

: IP 20

: maximum 9

5.2

Modular Cabinet Backplane - ROANB 101 23

The backplane is provided with a rectifier bridge and a DC/DC converter.

Input voltage

Maximum input power

: 36 to 42 Vac, or 44 to 58 Vdc

: 230 W for AC, or 570 W for DC

Output on 5V, +12V and –12V : Total maximum is 40 W

5 Vdc output

+12 Vdc output

– 12 Vdc output

: Max. 40 W

: Max. 12 W

48 Vdc output (not regulated) : Max. 160 W if AC input, or max. 530 W if DC input

5.3

Modular Cabinet Connection Board, MCCB - ROANB 101 28

The Modular Cabinet is provided with the MCCB mounted.

Length x width

Alarm output ratings

Power

: 7.5" x 5.3" (190.5 x 134.62mm)

: 10 VA maximum

: 50 Vdc maximum

: 0.75 Adc maximum

Voltage

Current

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

5-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Cabinets

5.4

5.5

Synchronization Distribution Board, SDB -REX-BRD0006 or ROANB 101 38

The SDB is mounted to the Modular Cabinet during system installation. It is part of the Sync Kit -

see Paragraph 5.5 only required in multiple system configurations.

Length x width

: 2.6" x 2.2" (66 x 56mm)

Connector for external cables : shielded modular jacks RJ12 with six terminals

Installation Set Sync Port CPU

The installation set comprises material to install the sync ports which enable PWT air interface

synchronization between DCT1900 systems. The set comprises the following material:

SDB

: Synchronization Distribution Board to be mounted to the

modular cabinet which enables the connection of

synchronization cabling.

CPU/SDB cables

CE Label

: Connects the CPU to the SDB.

: CE marking label to be used if the cabinet is CE marked.

5-2

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, System Boards

CHAPTER 6

System Boards

6.1

Digital Trunk Unit (DTU–E1 CAS, CCS) - REX-BRD0002 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/1

Compliance to Regulations and Standards

The DTU–E1 provides 2 standard CEPT primary rate interfaces and meets the following

requirements:

CE regulation

CE marking

: 91/263/EEC

(this marking is not placed on the DTU–E1 board

because the DCT1900 system is already covered by the CE

marking of the cabinet)

Leased line CTR

G.703

: CTR12

: Electrical characteristics of the 2.048 Mbit/s synchronization

interface

G.704

G.823

G.732

: Synchronization frame structure at 2.048 Mbit/s

: Input jitter requirements

: Characteristics of primary rate PCM multiplex equipment

operating at 2.048 Mbit/s

I.431

: Primary rate layer 1

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Relative humidity

: 32 to 104°F (0 to 70°C)

: -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C)

: 20 to 80%, non condensing

General Specifications

Length x width

13.5" x 7.7" (343 x 195.6mm)

Digital Trunk Specification

Number of primary rate

interfaces per DTU board

Bit rate

: 2

: 2.048 Mbit/s

Signalling

: Common Channel Signalling (CCS), using firmware set

NTM/RYSNB 101 17/3

: Channel Associated Signalling (CAS), using firmware set

RYS 105 664

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

6-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, System Boards

6.2

Digital Trunk Unit, DTU-T1, CAS - REX-BRD0021 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/2

Compliance to Regulations and Standards

The DTU–T1 provides 2 standard T1 interfaces. The DTU–T1 complies with the following EIA/TIA

recommendation:

EIA/TIA 464

: Private Branch Exchange (PBX) Switching Equipment for

Voice–band Applications.

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Relative humidity

: 32 to 104°F (0 to 70°C)

: -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C)

: 20 to 80%, non condensing

General Specifications

Length x width

13.5" x 7.7" (343 x 195.6mm)

Digital Trunk Specification

Number of T1

interfaces per DTU

Bit rate

: 2

: 1.544 Mbit/s

Signalling

: Channel Associated Signalling with bit Robbing (CAS BR)

according to EIA/TIA 464–A FXS DSX–1, using firmware set

RYS 105 660

6.3

Digital Trunk Unit -DTU–T1,CCS - REX-BRD0021 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/3

The DTU–T1 provides 2 standard T1 interfaces. The DTU–T1 complies with the following EIA/TIA

recommendation:

EIA/TIA 464

: Private Branch Exchange (PBX) Switching Equipment for

Voice–band Applications.

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Relative humidity

: 32 to 104°F (0 to 70°C)

: -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C)

: 20 to 80%, non condensing

General Specifications

Length x width

13.5" x 7.7" (343 x 195.6mm)

Digital Trunk Specification

Number of T1

interfaces per DTU

Bit rate

: 2

: 1.544 Mbit/s

Signalling

: Common Channel Signalling with a 64Kbps D channel using

Q.931 protocol with proprietary extensions for mobility

management, using firmware RYS 105 650.

6-2

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, System Boards

6.4

Central Processing Unit (CPU1) - REX-BRD0004 or 2/ROFNB 157 19/2

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Relative humidity

: 32 to 104°F (0 to 70°C)

: -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C)

: 20 to 80%, non condensing

General Specifications

Length x width

RS232 I/O ports

13.5" x 7.7" (343 x 195.6mm)

: 2

Sync

Input ports

Output ports

Lock in time

: 1 via coupler

: 3 via RS422 type drivers

: # 5 minutes after reset and power on

# 5 minutes after a signal interruption # 3 minutes

# 8.8 hours during normal operation

: immediate after interface failure

Loss of sync

6.5

Central Processing Unit (CPU2)-REX-BRD9033, REX-BRD9034

Environment

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Relative humidity

: 32 to 104°F (0 to 70 °C)

: -40 to 158°F (−40 to 70 °C)

: 20 to 80%, non condensing

General Specifications

Length x width

RS232 I/O ports

: 344 x 195 mm

: 2

Sync

Input ports

Output ports

Lock in time

: 1 via RJ45

: 3 via RJ45

: # 5 minutes after reset and power on

# 5 minutes after a signal interruption # 3 minutes

# 8.8 hours during normal operation

: immediate after interface failure

Loss of sync

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

6-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, System Boards

6.6

Speech Link Unit, SLU - REX-BRD0015 or ROFNB 157 16/1

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Relative humidity

: 32 to 104°F (0 to 70°C)

: -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C)

: 20 to 80%, non condensing

General Specifications

Length x width

13.5" x 7.7" (343 x 195.6mm)

Current Limitation

Current limitation of the Base

Stations power

: 1.3 A (T = 25 °C)

0.75 A (T = 70 °C)

Transport Data Rate

Data rate between SLU and

Base Station

: 384 kbit/s

Speech Coding

Telephone exchange side

: 64 kbit/s PCM (A–law or μ–law, country dependent,

downloaded from CPU)

Base Stations side

: 32 kbit/s ADPCM

DTMF Levels

Country dependent (downloaded from CPU)

Artificial Leakage

Only if a DTU is used

: -24 dB

Dial Tone Detection

Sensitivity level

Detection time

Frequencies

: -29 dBm

: 800 ms

: 350/440 Hz

6-4

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, System Boards

6.7

Speech Processing Unit, SPU-S - REX-BRD0017 or ROFNB 157 16/3

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Relative humidity

: 32 to 104°F (0 to 70°C)

: -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C)

: 20 to 80%, non condensing

General Specifications

Length x width

13.5" x 7.7" (343 x 195.6mm)

Speech Coding

Telephone exchange side

: 64 kbit/s PCM (A–law or μ–law, country dependent,

downloaded from CPU)

Base Stations side

: 32 kbit/s ADPCM

DTMF Levels

Country dependent (downloaded from CPU)

Artificial Leakage

Only if a DTU is used

: -24 dB

Dial Tone Detection

Sensitivity level

Detection time

Frequencies

: -29 dBm

: 800 ms

: 350/440 Hz

6.8

Cell Link Unit, CLU - REX-BRD0014 or ROFNB 157 11/2

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Relative humidity

: 32 to 104°F (0 to 70°C)

: -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C)

: 20 to 80%, non-condensing

Fusing

Power to the Base Stations is fused by two replaceable 1.0 AT fuses per Base Station.

Transport Data Rate

384 kbit/s

General Specifications

Length x width

13.5" x 7.7" (343 x 195.6mm)

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

6-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, System Boards

6.9

Cell Link Unit, CLU-S - REX-BRD0016 or ROFNB 157 16/2

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Relative humidity

: 32 to 104°F (0 to 70°C)

: -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C)

: 20 to 80%, non condensing

General Specifications

Length x width

13.5" x 7.7" (343 x 195.6mm)

Current Limitation

Current limitation of the Base

Stations power

: 1.3 A (T = 25 °C)

0.75 A (T = 70 °C)

Transport Data Rate

Data rate between SLU and

Base Station

: 384 kbit/s

Speech Coding

Base Stations side

: 32 kbit/s ADPCM

6-6

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, System Boards

6.10 Line Termination Unit, LTU - REX-BRD0007 or ROFNB 157 02/06

Compliance to Regulations and Standards

EIA-470

: USA

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Relative humidity

: 32 to 158°F (0 to 70°C)

: -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C)

: 20 to 80%, non condensing

General Specifications

Length x width

13.5" x 7.7" (343 x 195.6mm)

Telephone Line Interface Specifications

Insulation

: 1.5 kVac between line and secondary circuitry

: 1 kVac between line and cabinet

DC Characteristics

Range of line current

: 10-100mA

On–hook equivalent resistance : > 1M between wires a and b for 50 - 250 V

AC Characteristics

On–hook impedance

: > 100 k for voice signals

> 15 k for ringing signal

Off–hook impedance

: return loss optimized against 210 + (880 // 150 nF)

Ringing Detection

Ringing voltages

Frequency range

: 10 - 90 Vrms

: > 20 Hz

Pulse Dialing

Waveform

Selected digit N generates

: 60ms pulse, 40ms pulse-USA, Sweden

: N + 1 pulse or

N pulses and digit 0 generates 10 pulses

Resistance during pulsing

Line voltage

: > 5 M and < 560

: limited to 100 - 14Vdc

DTMF Dialling

The DTMF signals are determined by the combination of the SPU and the SICOFI parameters.

Speech Coding

Method

: software selectable

AD Gain

DA Gain

Hybrid balance impedance

: determined by SICOFI parameters

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

6-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, System Boards

6.11 Line Termination Unit , LTU2 - REX-BRD0019A

Compliance to Regulations and Standards

EIA-470

: USA

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Relative humidity

: 32 to 158°F (0 to 70°C)

: -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C)

: 20 to 80%, non condensing

General Specifications

Length x width

Weight

13.5" x 7.6" x .8" (344 x 192 x 20 mm)

.95 lb (430 grams) (excluding packaging)

Telephone Line Interface Specifications

Insulation

: 1.5 kVac between line and secondary circuitry

: 1 kVac between line and cabinet

DC Characteristics

Range of line current

: 60 mA max.

On–hook equivalent resistance : > 9 M between wires a and b for 200 Vdc

Resistance to earth (in quiescent

and loop state)

: 1 G between wires a/b and E-wire for up to 250 Vdc

AC Characteristics

On–hook impedance

Off–hook impedance

Return Loss

: Software programmable 600 or complex

: See ’Ringing Detection’

: 15 dB min.

Relative levels

: Software programmable

Input (AD loss) range

Output (DA loss) range

Balancing impedance

Longitudinal conversion loss

: 6 to -11dBr against 270 + (750 // 150 nF)

: 12 to -4.5 dBr against 270 + (750 // 150 nF)

: Software programmable; 600 , 900 or complex

: 60 dB min. between 50 Hz and 4 KHz

Ringing Detection

Ringing voltages

Impedance for voice signals

Capacity

: 10 k min. between 24 to 90 Vrms, 25 to 50 Hz

: 100 k min. at AC voltages up to 2 V (peak),300 Hz to 3400 Hz

: 1 μF +/- 5%

Ringing voltages

Insensitive to signals

Frequency range

: 24 to 120 Vrms

: 17 Vrms max.

: Software programmable between 16 and 64 Hz

Pulse Dialing

Make/break period

Selected digit N generates

Line Voltage during pulsing

: Software programmable between 0 to 255 ms

: N pulses and digit 0 generates either 10 pulses (default)

: Limited to 240 Vdc

6-8

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, System Boards

DTMF Dialling

The DTMF signals are determined by the combination of the output level of LTU and SPU

parameters.

Speech Coding

Standard

: G.712

Method

: 64 kbit/s A-law or μ−law PCM‘

Speech Coding

Method

: software selectable

AD Gain

DA Gain

Hybrid balance impedance

: determined by SICOFI parameters

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

6-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, System Boards

6.12 Digital Line Unit, DLU - REX-BRD0023

AWS1024 Meridian, AWS1025 Norstar, AWS1026 Lucent

The DLU has 12 analog front ends (ports) that provide 12 digital line interfaces to the PBX.

Compliance to Regulations and Standards

Safety

: ANSI/UL 60950

: CSA 22.2-950 3rd edition

: EN 61000-4-2

Electrostatic discharge

Radiated susceptibility

Electrically Fast

: EN 61-4-3

Transients (burst)

Conducted disturbances

Radiated and

: EN 61000-4-4

: EN 61000-4-6

Conducted Emissions

: EN 55022, procedure CISPR 22 and CISPR 16 Class A

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

: 32 to 158°F (0 to 70°C)

Storage

: -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C)

Relative humidity

: 95% max, non condensing at 77 to 158°F (25 - 70°C)

General Specifications

Length x width

: 13.0" x 7.0 x 0.79" (340 x 178 mm)

Maximum Power Consumption : 3.0 W at 5V

1.2 W at -12V

RS232 serial port

: 1 via a DB9 female connector

Digital Line Specification

Number of digital

interfaces per DLU

Bit rate

: 12

: Automatically adjusted for the PBX type it is configured for.

: Proprietary digital signal encoding.

Signalling

6-10

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Firmware (on EPROM)

CHAPTER 7

Firmware (on EPROM)

7.1

7.2

7.3

CPU DCT1900 Firmware (Mobility) - RYS 105 447

Firmware for CPU REX-BRD0004 or 2/ROFNB 157 19/2.

CPU DCT1900 Firmware (Standalone) - RYS 105 657

Firmware for CPU REX-BRD0004 or 2/ROFNB 157 19/2.

DTU–E1 CCS Firmware Set - NTM/RYSNB 101 17/3

Signalling: Common Channel Signalling (CCS)

Firmware for REX-BRD0002 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/1

7.4

7.5

7.6

DTU–E1 CAS Firmware Set - RYS 105 664

Signalling: Channel Associated Signalling (CAS)

Firmware for REX-BRD0002 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/1

DTU-T1 CCS Firmware - RYS 105 650

Signalling: Common Channel Signalling (CCS)

Firmware for REX-BRD0021 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/2

DTU-T1 CAS Firmware Set - RYS 105 660

Signalling: Channel Associated Signalling (CAS)

Firmware for REX-BRD0021 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/2

7.7

7.8

7.9

SLU Firmware - RYS 105 446; RYSNB 101 19; RYSNB 101 20

Firmware for REX-BRD0015 or ROFNB 157 16/1.

SPU-S Firmware - RYSNB 101 20

Firmware for REX-BRD0017 or ROFNB 157 16/3.

SPU-S DSP Firmware - REX-SW0013 or RYS 105 446 (μ-Law); RYSNB 101

22/1 (A-Law)

Firmware for REX-BRD0017 or ROFNB 157 16/3 and REX-BRD0017 or ROFNB 157 16/1.

7.10 CLU Firmware - RYT/ROFNB 157 11/2

Firmware for REX-BRD0014 or ROFNB 157 11/2.

7.11 CLU-S Firmware - RYSNB 101 19

Firmware for REX-BRD0016 or ROFNB 157 16/2 and REX-BRD0017 or ROFNB 157 16/1.

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

7-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Firmware (on EPROM)

7.12 LTU Firmware - REX-SW0012 or RYS 105 661

Firmware for REX-BRD0007 or ROFNB 157 02/03.

7.13 LTU2 Firmware - REX-LTU2FW01/1H

Firmware for REX-BRD0019A or ROFNB 157 25/2.

7-2

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Power Supply Units

CHAPTER 8

Power Supply Units

8.1

8.2

8.3

8.4

8.5

Modular Power Supply Kit - AWS 1071 (300W) New

Length x width x height

Input voltage

DC Output

: 9" x 4.5" x 2"

: 88 to 132 VAC

: 48V/6.5A

Operating temperature

: 32°F to 113°F (0 to 45°C)

Modular Power Supply Kit - NTM 201 1786 (300W)

Length x width x height

Input voltage

DC Output

: 8.5" x 5" x 1.75" (216 x 127 x 44.5mm)

: 102-130/240W:3.5A H.8A,50-60Hz

: 48V/6.25A

Operating temperature

: -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C)

Modular Power Supply Kit - NTM 201 1752 (200W) Discontinued

Length x width x height

Input voltage

DC Output

: 12" x 6.5" x 4" (304.8 x 165 x 101.6mm)

: 102-120/200-240V 7A, 50 or 60 Hz

: 48V/4.16A

Operating temperature

: -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C)

Remote Base Station Power Supply Kit - NTM 201 1785

Length x width x height

Input voltage

: 6.25" x 2.88" x 7" (158.75 x 73 x 177.8mm)

: 102 to 132Vac, 50 or 60Hz, 2.5A

DC Output

Operating temperature

: 24 ± 1.5Vdc at 4.0A or 48 ± 1.5Vdc at 2.0A

: -22 to 122°F (-30 to 50°C)

Remote Base Station Plug-In Power Supply - BML 161 139

Length x width x height

Input voltage

DC Output

: 4.72" x 2.67" x 2.22" (120 x 68 x 56.4mm)

: 120 Vac, 60Hz, .625A

: .25A

Operating temperature

: -22 to 122°F (-30 to 50°C)

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

8-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Power Supply Units

8-2

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Cables

CHAPTER 9

Cables

9.1

Cables for Modular Cabinet

Interconnection Set - NTMNB 101 105

To interconnect two adjacent Modular Cabinets.

Flat cable

Shielding gaskets (4)

Safety ground cable

: Connects the backplanes, two 34–pin connectors

: Connects the metal housing of the cabinets

: Connects the ground of the cabinets

CLU/MDF Cable Set – NTM/TSRNB 101 29

This cable set consists of two similar cables. The only difference is the position of the shielding

clamp.

Cable length

: 16.40 ft. (4.95m), 2 cables

Wires

Connector CLU side

Connector MDF side

: 12 twisted pairs (each cable)

: 32 pins, DIN41612 (each cable)

: Amphenol 50 pin (contains hood and connection for 24AWG-

26AWG): Cable Diameter = .350 - .425

P/N: 1-229912-1 (mate plug)

Cable Diameter = .425 - .500

P/N: 3-22912-1

CLU/MDF Cable Set Long - NTM/TSRNB 101 46

Cable length

: 82.02 ft. (24.78m), 2 cables

Wires

Connector CLU side

Connector MDF side

: 12 twisted pairs (each cable)

: 32 pins, DIN 41612

: none

CLU/MCCB Power Cable – TSRNB 101 33

Cable length

: 19.69 in. (500mm)

Wires

: 2

Connector CLU side

Connector MCCB side

: 2 pins, Ericsson power connector

: 2 pins, MOLEX mini–fit, Jr

DTU/MCCB Cable – TSRNB 101 37

Cable length

: 18.90 in. (480mm)

Wires

: 2 coaxial pairs

Connector DTU side

Connector MCCB side

: 10 pins, DIN41612

DTU/PBX Cable Set - NTM/TSRNB 101 49 (AWS1033)

Cable length

Wires

Connector DTU side

Connector PBX side

: 49.21 ft. (14.87m), 2 cables

: 2 twisted pairs (each cable)

: 16 pins, DIN41612

: 8 pins, DIN41612.

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

9-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Cables

DTU-T1/MDF Twisted Pair Cable - TRSNB 101 50 (AWS1034)

Cable length

Wires

: 16.40 ft. (4.95m)

: 4 twisted pairs

Connector DTU side

Connector MDF side

: two 8 pin connectors, DIN41612

: none

LTU/MDF Cable Set - NTM/TSRNB 101 31

Cable length

: 16.40 ft. (4.95m), 2 cables

Wires

: 24 twisted pairs

Connector DLU side

Connector PBX side

: 16 pins, DIN4612 (6 connectors)

: 25 pair male Amphenol

DLU/PBX Cable Set - AWS1019

Cable length

: 16.40 ft. (4.95m), 2 cables

Wires

Connector DTU side

Connector PBX side

: 24 gauge, 12 twisted pairs, non-shielded, (each cable)

: 8 pins, RJ45, (24 connectors)

: 25 pair male Amphenol

PABX Cable (E1) - TSRNB 101 12

Cable length

: 49.21 ft. (14.87m)

Wires

Connector DTU side

Connector PBX side

: 2 coaxial pins

: 10 pins, DIN41612

: none

PC/SMS Cable - TSRNB 101 22/D

Cable Length

: 9.84 ft. (2.97m)

Connector DCT1900 side

Connector PC side

: 9 pin sub–D, female

Printer Cable - TSRNB 101 23

Cable Length

: 9.84 ft. (2.97m)

Connector DCT1900 side

Connector printer side

: 9 pin sub–D, female

: 25 pin sub–D, male

Modem Cable - TSR 951 282

Cable length

: 10 ft. (3.02m)

Wires

: 4 conductor

Connector - System

Connector - Modem

: DB - 9 male, plastic housing

: DB - 25 male, plastic housing

Sync Cable - TSR 951 284

Cable length

Wires

: 20 ft. (6.04m)

: 6 conductor

Connector - System/Sync Port : 6 pin shielded RJ12 connector

Connector - Modem : 6 pin shielded RJ12 connector

DT600 Portable Telephone Programming Cable - KRY 101 1135/8

Cable length

: 5 ft. (1.5m)

Wires

: 6 conductor

Connector - Portable side

Connector - PC side

: 14 pin connector

: RJ12 connector

9-2

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Cables

DT620 Portable Telephone Programming Cable - KRY 101 1135/10

Cable length

: 5 ft. (1.5m)

Wires

: 6 conductor

: 12 pin connector

: RJ12 connector with offset latch

Connector - Portable side

Connector - PC side

DLU Programming Cable - AWS1027

Cable Length

: 9.84 ft. (2.97m)

Connector DLU side

Connector PC side

: 9 pin sub–D, male

: 9 pin sub–D, female

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

9-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Cables

9-4

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Software

CHAPTER 10

Software

Note:

The following abbreviations are used in this chapter: CSMW = Cordless System Manager, which

now includes the Statistics package.

10.1 CSMW Software Kit, UTAM - REX-MTC9023

Software application and CSMW Users manual on CD. Floppy disk copies may be ordered from

you distributor.

Minimum PC configuration

Minimum Personal Computer Configuration

Windows 95, 98, ME, NT 40.0 or 2000

10MB disk space

Super VGA monitor or better

Comctl32.dll version 4.72 or later (with oder version, the buttons in the toolbar maybe

invisible). The newest version is available at http://www.microsoft.com/msdownload/

ieplatform/ie/comctrlx86.asp

Keyboard

Mouse

2 dedicated com ports

CD ROM drive

10.2 CSMW Software Kit, International - REX-MTC9022

Software application and CSMW Users manual on CD. Floppy disk copies may be ordered from

you distributor.

Minimum PC configuration

Windows 95, 98, ME, NT 40.0 or 2000

10MB disk space

Super VGA monitor or better

Comctl32.dll version 4.72 or later (with oder version, the buttons in the toolbar maybe

invisible). The newest version is available at http://www.microsoft.com/msdownload/

ieplatform/ie/comctrlx86.asp

Keyboard

Mouse

2 dedicated com ports

CD ROM drive

10.3 Feature and Phonebook Download Tool - AWS1092

To be used with Portable Telephones (DT600, DT620, 9p23) and Programmer Set 6412302.

Minimum PC configuration

Windows 95, 98, ME, NT 40.0 or 2000

10MB disk space

2 COM port

CD ROM drive

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

10-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Software

10.4 Site Survey Tool Configuration Manager - LZY 213 1104

For configuration of Portable Telephones for the Site Survey Tool (LTT 601 103)

IBM compatible diskette

: 3.5"/1.44Mb

Minimum PC configuration

MS-WINDOWS 95/NT 4.0 or higher compatible 486 PC

MS-WINDOWS 95/NT 4.0 or higher

One COM–port (V.24)

3.5 inch high density floppy drive (1.44 Mb)

10-2

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Accessories-Portable Telephone

CHAPTER 11

Accessories-Portable Telephone

11.1 Accessories for the DT600

Batteries

High Capacity NiMH Battery - BKB 193 1021

Vibrating Battery, NiMH - BKB 191 312

Chargers

Desk Multi-Charger Kit - AWS1001

Rack Charger Kit - NTM 201 2057

Cases

Standard Case - AWS1005B

Extended Case - AWS1002B

Standard Case White- AWS1005W

Nylon Pouch - KRY 101 1753

Headset Adaptors

Headset Adapter without hook switch- KRY 105 120

Headset Adapter with hoof switch- KRY 101 1776

General

Antenna, Micro - KRE 101 1843/1

Silent Call Alert - KRY 105 1014/55

Replacement Flip - SXA 120 1131/2

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

11-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Accessories-Portable Telephone

11.2 Accessories for the DT620

Batteries

High Capacity NiMH Battery - BKB 193 104/75

Ultra-Slim Line NiMH Battery - BKB 193 105/75

Chargers

Desktop Multicharger - AWS1007

Docking Station - DPY 901 034

Rack Charger Kit, 115VAC - NTM 201 2512/1

Rack Charger Kit, 230VAC - NTM 201 2512/2

Cases

Standard Case - AWS1003B

Extended Case - AWS1004B

Standard Case White- AWS1003W

Headset Adaptors

Headset Adapter - RPM 113 2067

Portable Handsfree w/Adapter - RLF 501 06/02

General

Antenna, Micro - KRE 101 1843/1

Antenna, Micro Red - AWS1021

Silent Call Alert - KRY 101 1763/03

11-2

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Accessories-Portable Telephone

11.3 Accessories for the 9p23

Batteries

9p23 Messenger Battery - 643100

9p23 Medic Battery - 643102

9p23 Messenger Battery w/Headset Connection - 643101

9p23 Medic Battery w/Headset Connection - 643103

Chargers

9p23 Mesenger Desktop Charger w/110v - 641303

9p23 Medic Desktop Charger w/110v - 641304

9p23 Modular Rack Charger, US Power Module - 641300

9p23 Modular Rack Charger, 4 Slot Module - RC23

9p23 RC23 U.S. Conversion Package - 641301

Headsets and Adapters

9p23 Headset w/mic on boom - F150067

9p23 Headset w/hearing protection and earmuff hook swt. - 653045

9p23 Headset w/cable mic - F150068

9p23 Messenger Battery w/Headset Connection - 643101

9p23 Medic Battery w/Headset Connection - 643103

9p23 Headset Adapter Cable - AWS1110 (This adapter enables the use of non-proprietary

headsets.

General

9p23 Programmer Set - 641302

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

11-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, Accessories-Portable Telephone

11-4

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Configuration Directions

Section 4

Configuration Directions

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Configuration Directions

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Configuration Directions, Table of Contents

Table of Contents

C HAPTER 1

C HAPTER 2

Limitations of the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1

2.2

Modular Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Modular Cabinet Powering Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

C HAPTER 3

Base Station Plannin g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Total Area Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Absorption and Reflection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Departmental Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Site Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Base Station Count Estimating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

C HAPTER 4

Base Station Powering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Powering Base Stations by a Remote Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Powering Base Stations via the Modular Cabine t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -2

–48V External Source Powering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Alternative for Calculating the Power Consumption per Base Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Traffic Capacity of the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.1

5.2

5.3

Traffic Capacity of the Radio Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Traffic Capacity of the Base Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Traffic Capacity of the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

C HAPTER 6

Relation between Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Configuration Directions, Table of Contents

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Configuration Directions, Introduction

CHAPTER 1

Introduction

The DCT1900 system was developed as a modular system in order to obtain maximum flexibility

in initial configuration and future growth. Each system can be configured to satisfy the specific

customer requirements.

The Configuration Directions provide an explanation of the different factors that influence the size

of a system and their acceptable values. Restricting limitations are also discussed. The factors

that determine the final configuration of a system are:

number of Base Stations

number of Portable Telephones in the coverage area

traffic requirements for the system

Furthermore, the system has a number of restrictions that give limitations to the configuration.

These items are explained in the following chapters.

To determine a system configuration, the limitations of the system must be known first. These are

described in Chapter 2.

The number of Base Stations determine the number of CLCs to be used. The number of CLCs,

together with the cable lengths, define the power requirements for the power supply and the

number of SLUs and/or CLUs to be used. The required number of Base Stations can be found by

doing a site survey. Site Surveys and Base Station powering are discussed in Chapters 3 and 4.

The traffic requirements for a system are determined by the amount of Portable Telephones in the

coverage area (visiting Portable Telephones included), the estimated traffic generated per

Portable Telephone and the GOS accepted by the customer. These figures define the number of

SPUs required. Traffic requirements are explained in Chapter 5.

When the number of each system board type needed in a system is known, the number of

cabinets, power supplies, internal cables, etc. can be calculated. The relationships between all

these parts are outlined in Chapter 6.

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw

1-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Configuration Directions, Introduction

1-2

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Configuration Directions, Limitations of the System

CHAPTER 2

Limitations of the System

2.1

Modular Cabinets

Cabinet

A system can support up to 4 cabinets. Each cabinet provides space for a combination of 9

system boards. This means that the total size of the system may be 36 system boards. All boards,

except for the CPU which is always placed in cabinet 1, can in principle be placed in any slot.

However, due to the MCCB layout and power limitations not all combinations are allowed.

Powering limitations of the Modular Cabinet are discussed in paragraph 2.2.

Connection Board

A Modular Cabinet has only one MCCB which is factory fitted. The MCCB provides Base Station

power connections for a total of 7 CLU and/or SLU boards.

Power Supply

Modular Cabinets are powered by an external -48Vdc supply. Base Stations may be powered by

the same power supply or by a second external power supply connected to the MCCB.

Base Stations

The number of Base Stations is limited to 120. A number of Base Stations can be powered via a

single cabinet as mentioned above. Furthermore, the external power source specifications can

limit the maximum number of Base Stations.

Number of Portable Telephones

The number of Portable Telephones that can be supported by the Standalone DCT1900 system is

600 when digital trunks (DTUs) are used, 144 when digital links (DLUs) are used and 208 Portable

Telephones when analog lines (LTUs) are used. The number of Portable Telephones supported by

the DCT1900 Mobility System controlled by the MS but cannot exceed 2048 for a single RE.

CPU Firmware

The memory space reserved by the CPU for each type of board is limited to a maximum of 15 CLU

boards, 8 SPU/SLU, 34 LTU, 10 DTU-E1 , 34 DLU and 13 DTU-T1.

Cabling

When the cable length is only data limited, Base Stations may be connected up to a distance of 2.2

miles away from the REs when using a CLU board, or 1.3 miles when using a SLU/CLU-S board.

In case the cable length is power limited, the distance depends on the powering method that is

used (see Chapter 4).

For the DTU E1 card, in case a cable other than the Ericsson supplied cable is used between the

RE and the PBX to cover a longer distance, this cable should not attenuate more than 6dB at

1.024 MHz (e.g. a cable with an attenuation of 2 dB/100 m at 1.024 MHz gives a maximum

distance of 328 yards). The maximum length of 100 ohm cable used to connect the DTU-T1 to a

PBX/Centrex is 666 ft.

All twisted pair cables are shielded signal cables and the shield must be tied to ground by using

the ground strip at the bottom of the cabinet. This ground strip provides cable connections for any

combination of up to 8 twisted pair shielded cable sets.

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw

2-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Configuration Directions, Limitations of the System

Synchronization Distribution (DCT1900 Mobility Configuration Only)

A DCT1900 system can provide synchronization to three other DCT1900 systems if it is the

synchronization master or is connected to a synchronization master (only two levels are allowed,

see also Figure 2–1). If PWT air interface (frame) synchronization is required between DCT1900

systems, then the DCT1900 systems have to be connected to each other by means of an external

sync cable. The maximum external sync cable length is .8 mile (this value depends on the core

diameter of the cable, refer to Chapter 18, Paragraph 18.2 of the Installation Instructions for more

details).

Slave

Master

Level 1

Slave

Level 2

Fig. 2–1 Synchronization Topology

2-2

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Configuration Directions, Limitations of the System

2.2

Modular Cabinet Powering Restrictions

Although the Modular Cabinet has space for 9 boards, not all board combinations are allowed due

to power limitations of the DC/DC converter on the backplane. This converter is specified as

follows:

+5 V

+12 V

-12 V

total

can supply 40 W at maximum

can supply 12 W at maximum

must be <40 W

Table 2–1 shows the power consumption per board type. From this table, it can be calculated if a

configuration matches the power requirements. The values given to the 12V of the LTU indicates

the power consumption in the case where all LTU circuits are off hooks.

Note:

Due to a minimum required power consumption from the DC/DC converter, at least two boards

must be present in each cabinet.

B o a r d T y p e

+ 1 2

- 1 2

C P U - 2 R E X - B R D 9 0 3 3

R E X - B R D 9 0 3 4

C P U

S P U - S R E X - B R D 0 0 1 7

S L U R E X - B R D 0 0 1 5

C L U - S R E X - B R D 0 0 1 6

C L U R E X - B R D 0 0 1 4

D T U - E 1 , C C S / C A S

R E X - B R D 0 0 0 2

D T U - T 1 , C A S

R E X - B R D 0 0 2 1

D T U - T 1 C C S

R E X - B R D 0 0 2 1

R E X - B R D 0 0 0 4

9 . 6

3 . 5 5

6 . 9

3 . 4 5

3 . 6

4 . 5

L T U

R E X - B R D 0 0 0 7

R E X - B R D 0 0 1 9

R E X - B R D 0 0 2 3

A W S 1 0 2 4

1 . 5

2 . 5

6 . 5

. 7 5

1 . 2

L T U - 2

D L U

A W S 1 0 2 5

A W S 1 0 2 6

Table 2–1 Power Consumption per Board

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw

2-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Configuration Directions, Limitations of the System

2-4

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Configuration Directions, Base Station Planning

CHAPTER 3

Base Station Planning

The major task in configuring a DCT1900 system is defining the number of Base Stations required

to cover an area to a satisfactory level. This Chapter describes how a Base Station plan can be

made in order to gain full area coverage. Chapter 5, Paragraph 5.2 explains how traffic

requirements additionally influence the number of Base Stations.

Another aspect of Base Station configuration is powering of Base Stations. The various ways of

distributing power to the Base Stations and the requirements on the power supply are described in

Chapter 4.

3.1

Introduction

The radio environment or the cell that is covered by a Base Station is not a spherical shape as

often suggested in drawings. If a snapshot could be taken of the cell, it would become clear that its

shape is more of a cloud form. The momentary size and shape vary depending on the material of

which walls and floors are made of, the position and material of furniture, machines, air–

conditioning and the position of the Base Station in such an environment. Because of these

unpredictable conditions it is not possible to give any hard rules for calculating the number of Base

Stations in a given situation.

Base Station planning is not very difficult. However, size, architecture and the structure of

buildings and their influence on the RF field pattern cannot be foreseen. The quickest and simplest

way to do the Base Station Plan is by measuring. During a site survey, an average cell size can be

determined, with the help of a Site Survey Tool. This forms the basis of Base Station planning.

Experience is the best guide in making a Base Station plan.

The guide–lines listed below will help give a better view on the local situation when the placement

of Base Stations is being planned. Paragraph 3.6 explains how a site survey can be done.

3.2

Total Area Coverage

The in–house cell size in offices may be in a range of 30-200 ft. radius; see Figure 3–1.

The cell size in exhibition halls or production halls may go up to a 660 ft. radius when there is

enough free space for radio signals to travel.

The cell size outdoors in free space may be up to 1000+ ft. radius.

Base Stations should not be placed near the outer walls of the building as this reduces the

effective coverage area, except of course when a parking area, for example, has to be

covered.

Base Stations may partially cover the floors immediately above and below as well. The useful

range through floors and ceiling varies between a 0 and 26 ft. (2 floors) radius; see Figure 3–1.

3.3

Absorption and Reflection

The cell size depends on the materials used in walls, ceilings and floors.

Plain, light or reinforced concrete, wood and plaster all absorb and pass radio waves in

different ways.

Metal walls and large metal cabinet rows reflect all signals, resulting in greatly reduced

coverage behind these areas.

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw

3-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Configuration Directions, Base Station Planning

X–ray rooms in hospitals protected by lead walls, computer rooms in banking buildings

protected against unwanted interference, etc. do not allow radio signals to enter.

Exhibition halls or production halls may give reflections due to huge metal structures. This

causes interference which reduces the capacity and coverage area per Base Station.

3.4

3.5

Departmental Differences

More traffic is generated in sales, purchasing, technical support departments, cafeterias, etc.

than finance & administration or research & development. Consequently, a higher traffic

capacity is needed in these areas requiring additional Base Stations to be installed. More

details follow in Chapter 5.

Architecture

Central areas giving access to stairs and elevators may require extra Base Stations due to

heavier constructions.

Coverage in elevators may require Base Stations closer to or in the elevator shaft.

Corners and irregularities in the construction (partial renovation, extensions of older buildings

etc.) have an influence.

Concentration of air–conditioning ducts, etc. may influence the coverage.

132 ft.

Base Station 1

Base Station 2

11.4 ft.

Base Station 3

Front view of a building

conference

room

office

54 ft.

corridor

Base

Station 1

pantry

office

Top view of top floor

Fig. 3–1 Example of the locations of Base Stations in a building

3-2

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Configuration Directions, Base Station Planning

3.6

Site Survey

To satisfy area coverage and traffic demands, the site must be surveyed in order to determine the

number and position of Base Stations. To do a site survey, a site survey tool and floor plans of the

building are required. With the help of these tools proper Base Station planning can be done.

Samples must be taken to determine an average cell size. With the average cell size, Base Station

positions can be indicated on the map together with the area covered by each Base Station.

Difficult spots can be mapped as well. After this, the planned positions can be verified with the site

survey tool and with the help of the traffic requirements, a final plan can be made.

When doing the survey with the Site Survey Tool, read the instructions below:

1. Observe the building to find a "typical area"

Modern buildings usually have standard constructions. In older buildings, due to renovations

or expansions, areas with different structures may exist. However, inside these areas a

uniformity in structure can be found again.

Find an area with a typical structure for the building and of about the expected cell size. This

area will be used to determine the typical cell size. With a building with different structures, find

the cell size of each of those areas, so that differences in "typical cell size" can be detected.

2. Measure the horizontal cell size on the middle floor, see Figure 3–2, (1)

The cell size is measured by setting up a call with a portable and listening to the speech

quality. This test is more accurate, faster and easier to use than the RQI indicator of the

Portable Telephone’s DCS. See Section 6, "Commissioning" in this manual.

The cell size can be determined as follows:

Install a Base Station in the middle of the "typical area" and power the Site Survey Tool.

Switch a Portable Telephone to DCA mode and set up a call.

Walk away from the Base Station in one direction. Also enter rooms with the Portable

Telephone switching to your left and right hand.

The edge of the cell is found as soon as crackling sounds and/or mutes appear. Step back

to where no mutes or sounds were heard. Verify whether the RQI remains stable on 20

and measure the distance to the Base Station. Within a cell, no mutes or clicks should be

heard and the RQI should be stable on value 20.

Do the same in the opposite direction.

The two distances should be about the same. This is the horizontal coverage on the floor

of the Base Station.

3. Measure horizontal range on floor above, see Figure 3–2, (2)

Go to the floor above, leaving the Base Station on its current location and measure the

horizontal coverage here.

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw

3-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Configuration Directions, Base Station Planning

4. Measure horizontal range on floor below, see Figure 3–2, (3).

Go to the floor below, leaving the Base Station on its current location and measure the

horizontal coverage again.

Note:

If the building is quite transparent to radio signals, the vertical coverage can reach to another floor

above and below.

In this way the horizontal and vertical coverage of a single Base Station in a typical area is found.

The cell size found can be taken as an average and used to calculate the total number of Base

Stations. From Figure 3–2 it is clear that three Base Stations can cover a building as seen in

Figure 3–1.

Depending on the size of the building and the type of construction, one or two more "random

checks" in typical areas can be done to verify the first measurement. The typical cell size is then

found by averaging the values.

132 ft.

1= 132 ft.

2= 66 ft.

3= 66 ft.

11.4 ft.

Base Station of Demo Case

Fig. 3–2 Measurement of Typical Cell Size

5. Making a plan

With the "typical cell size" found, make a sketch of all Base Station positions on the floor

plan. Indicate the expected coverage for each Base Station on the map.

Verify with the Site Survey Tool if the real coverage is as expected from the map.

Especially verify coverage in difficult areas such as elevators, stairways and

discontinuities in construction.

If weak areas are found, see if re–positioning of Base Stations solves it; otherwise, plan an

extra base station.

Take into consideration that in free space, with antennas in upright position, the coverage

is horizontal more than vertical. Although in normal office environments this effect is

negligible due to the amount of reflections, it still may be worth trying to place Base

Stations horizontally in order to get more vertical coverage such as in stairways.

3-4

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Configuration Directions, Base Station Planning

Antenna pattern

Note:

Only half of the

antenna pattern

is drawn for

clarity

Antenna in

vertical

position

Antenna in

horizontal

position

Fig. 3–3 Antenna Pattern

6. Finalizing the plan

When all Base Station positions on the map are verified and the plan is in place, discuss

with the parties concerned whether, due to local traffic requirements, (see Chapter 5,

Section 5.2), extra Base Stations are needed in particular areas. Integrate these Base

Stations with the plan.

Thus a final Base Station plan is made and tested simultaneously.

3.7

Base Station Count Estimating

Base station counts may be estimated by using the approximation formula seen below. Enter the

total coverage area of interest as well as the anticipated radius of coverage.

(Atotal)

N = ------------------------

(2 × (R²))

N = number of base stations

Atotal = total coverage area

R = anticipated coverage radius

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw

3-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Configuration Directions, Base Station Planning

3-6

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

CHAPTER 4

Base Station Powering

4.1

General

After a Base Station plan has been made (see Chapter 3), it must be established which powering

method is more suitable to power the Base Stations. The methods for powering a Base Station are:

Via the RE

By a remote power supply

The choice of the method depends upon:

The distance between the RE and the Base Stations

The total number of Base Stations

Whether power back–up is needed or not

Installation costs

Paragraph 4.2 describes the powering of Base Stations by means of a remote power supply.

Paragraph 4.3 describes the powering options for the Modular Cabinet. The tables used in this

chapter are given in Paragraph 4.4.

The length limits for the Base Station cable are described below.

Data Limited Length of the Base Station Cable

Data transmission via twisted pairs is limited to a certain range. The "data limited" length of the

cables between the RE and the Base Stations depends on the system board used (CLU or SLU),

the characteristics of the cable, and the noise on the cable. Table 4–1 shows the data limited

length for some cables.

Note:

Since it is not possible to predict the noise level in an environment and its influence on a cable, the

values from the table should be taken as a guide-line more than a rule. Practically, the maximum

length may exceed these values, in case there is less noise and vice versa if there is more noise.

Power Limited Length of Base Station Cable

When a Base Station is powered via the cabinet, the maximum length between the Base Station

and the RE depends on the supply voltage, the number of twisted pairs used and the wire size.

The length of the cable should never exceed the "data–limited" length of the cable.

4.2

Powering Base Stations by a Remote Power Supply

When Base Stations are powered by a remote power supply, only a cable with two twisted pairs is

required between a Base Station and the RE for data transfer (see Figure 4–1).

Powering Base Stations with a remote power supply can be done by using the EPP pins on the

Base Station connector. Base Stations can be powered individually or in clusters from a central

power source. A cluster can be e.g. Base Stations on the same floor or in the same building,

assuming that Base Stations within the cluster are close enough to the remote power supply. The

length of the cable between the Base Station and the RE is "data limited". See Table 4-1 for the

maximum cable length.

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw

4-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Configuration Directions, Base Station Powering

data pair

SC0

SC1

Radio

Exchange

Local

Power

EPP

Base

Station

Fig. 4–1 Powering Base Stations by a remote Supply

4.3

Powering Base Stations via the Modular Cabinet

Base Stations are powered via the following path:

External source-MCCB-CLU/SLU-Base Station

Base Stations are connected to the CLU or SLU via an MDF by 2, 3 or 4 twisted pair cables. The

maximum permissible length depends on the wire size and the number of pairs used between the

MDF and Base Station. The CLU/MDF cable contains only one Express Powering Pair (EPP), but

this may be doubled up on the MDF. Table 4–2 shows the maximum cable lengths.

4.3.1 –48V External Source Powering

Via an external -48V source, any configuration of cabinets and Base Stations can be powered as

long as the power specifications of the external source are met. This method is suitable for any

situation where PBX power is available (see Figure 4–2) or any other -48V supply with sufficient

current capacity. The maximum cable lengths are given in Table 4–2 (42V and 48V column).

CAB

PBX

Fig. 4-2 Modular Cabinets powered by PBX

4-2

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Note:

When using the PBX option refer to the PBX supplier and/or PBX documentation to assure that the

PBX power supply matches the worst case power requirements of the DCT1900 system.

The external source must supply –48Vdc, which may be connected to the backplane for powering

the system boards and directly to the MCCB for powering the Base Stations. Each cabinet uses 50

Watts maximum to power the Boards.

Tables 4-3 and 4-4 can be used to calculate the power requirements for the Base Stations. Table

4-3 has to be used when a battery back–up is used. Table 4-4 has to be used when no battery

back–up is used. The alternative method described in Paragraph 4.5 can be used as well.

The number of Base Stations powered per Modular Cabinet is limited by the MCCB which can

connect up to a total of 7 CLUs and SLUs to distribute Base Station power.

Base

Station

PW-

EXT

CLUs

Backplane

Internal

MCCB

External

Source

Modular Cabinet

Fig. 4-3 Powering Base Stations via Modular Cabinet with External Source

4.4

Tables

In this Paragraph the Tables for the maximum cable length between the Base Stations and the RE

and tables for the power consumption of the Base Stations and their cables are given.

Table 4–1 gives the "data limited" length of the cable and Table 4–2 gives the "power limited"

length of the cable. See Paragraph 4.1 for the description of these terms.

How the Values in the Tables are Calculated

The power limited lengths have been calculated using the following formula. This formula can be

used for supply voltages of 42V and higher.

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw

4-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Configuration Directions, Base Station Powering

⎛

⎜

⎝

⎞

⎟

⎠

U²

4×R

l_max= ×

−

P ×R

Base

where:

n = number of twisted pairs (when using data pairs only: n=2)

U = power supply voltage

= worst case power consumption of Base Station = 7.5W

Base

= resistance of twisted pair per meter (double value of single wire)

R = dc losses in filters, transformers and connectors = 1

If the supply voltage is 42 Volts or lower, the following formula must be used to calculate to the

power limited lengths:

⎛

⎜

⎝

⎞

⎟

⎠

U_min×

(

U−U_min

)

l_max=n×

−

P ×R

Base

where:

n = number of twisted pairs (when using data pairs only: n=2)

U = power supply voltage

= minimum input voltage of Base Station = 21V

min

= worst case power consumption of Base Station = 7.5W

Base

= resistance of twisted pair per meter (double value of single wire)

R = dc losses in filters, transformers and connectors = 1

Tables 4-3 and 4-4 give the power consumed by the Base Stations and their cables for different

supply voltages. The consumed power ranges from about 7.5W for zero length cables to 15W

maximum cable lengths (given in Table 4–2). The consumed power has been calculated using the

following formula:

l´R

⎛

⎞

⎜

⎟

U− U −4×

+R ×P

Base

⎟

⎝

⎠

P=U×

l×R

⎛

⎞

⎜

⎟

2×

⎟

⎝

⎠

where:

n = number of twisted pairs (when using data pairs only: n=2)

U = power supply voltage

= worst case power consumption of Base Station = 7.5W

Base

= resistance of twisted pair per meter (double value of single wire)

R = dc losses in filters, transformers and connectors = 1

l = length of the cable

4-4

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

The following resistance values for the twisted pairs are used:

26 AWG wire cable

24 AWG wire cable

22 AWG wire cable

: .082 /ft.

: .055 /ft.

: .034 /ft.

Tables

Cable

Maximum cable length

Type

Capacitance

Superimposed noise

8 mV/pHz

Superimposed noise

Wire size (∅)

10 mV/pHz

AWG

CLU

11/2

SLU

CLU-s

CLU

11/2

SLU

CLU-s

Twisted pair

26ga

24ga

22ga

15 pF/ft.

40 pF/ft.

7540 ft.

11480 ft.

6880 ft.

6160 ft.

4920 ft.

6880 ft.

4260 ft.

3930 ft.

6560 ft.

9840 ft.

5900 ft.

4920 ft.

4260 ft.

6230 ft.

3930 ft.

3280 ft.

Double twisted pair

(J–Y (St)Y 2 2 0.6)

Table 4–1 "Data Limited" Cable Length

Worst Case Power Consumption of Base Station =

Based pm Class 3 =

7.5

dbm

Minimum Input Voltage of Base Station =

Maximum Cable Length (feet)

Wire size

Power Supply Voltage

27.5 V

Power Supply Voltage

42 V

Power Supply Voltage

48 V

( )

∅

0 EPP

418

1 EPP

627

0 EPP

1405

1 EPP

2107

0 EPP

1842

1 EPP

2763

26 awg

24 awg

22 awg

627

941

2107

3161

2763

4145*

6782*

1026

1539

3448*

5172*

4522*

* Cable lengths should never exceed the values given in Table 4–1, because of data limitations

Table 4–2 Maximum Cable Length when Powering via Data Pairs and Express Powering Pairs

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw

4-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Configuration Directions, Base Station Powering

Cable

length

(Feet)

26 AWG (0.4 mm) wire size (

)

24 AWG (0.5 mm) wire size (

)

22 AWG (0.64 mm) wire size (

)

∅

1 pair

2 pairs

3 pairs

1 pair

2 pairs

3 pairs

1 pair

2 pairs

3 pairs

7.5

8.6

8.7

8.8

8.9

9.0

9.1

9.2

9.3

9.4

9.5

9.6

9.7

9.8

10.0

10.3

10.6

10.9

11.3

11.8

12.5

13.3

15.0

7.5

8.6

8.7

8.8

8.9

9.0

9.1

9.2

9.3

9.4

9.5

9.6

9.7

9.9

10.1

10.3

10.6

10.9

11.3

11.7

12.2

12.9

14.0

7.5

8.5

8.8

8.6

8.7

8.6

164

9.1

8.8

8.7

8.9

8.7

8.6

246

9.5

9.0

8.8

9.1

8.8

8.9

8.6

328

10.0

9.1

8.9

9.4

8.9

9.0

8.7

410

10.7

9.3

9.0

9.7

9.0

9.2

8.7

492

11.6

9.5

9.1

10.0

9.1

9.3

8.7

574

13.1

9.8

9.3

10.5

9.3

9.5

8.8

656

10.0

9.4

10.9

9.4

9.7

8.8

738

10.3

9.5

11.6

9.5

9.9

8.9

820

10.7

9.7

12.5

9.7

10.1

8.9

902

11.1

9.9

14.0

9.9

10.3

9.0

984

11.6

10.0

10.6

9.0

1066

1148

1230

1312

1476

1640

1804

1968

2132

2296

2460

2624

2788

2952

3116

3280

3444

3608

3772

3936

4100

4264

4428

4592

12.2

10.2

10.9

9.1

13.1

10.5

11.3

9.1

14.7

10.7

11.7

9.2

10.9

12.2

9.2

11.6

14.0

9.3

12.5

9.4

14.0

9.5

9.7

9.8

9.9

10.1

10.2

10.4

10.6

10.8

11.0

11.3

11.6

11.9

12.2

12.7

13.2

14.0

15.4

Table 4–3 Power Consumption (Watts) of Base Stations and Cabling when Powered with 42V

4-6

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Cable

length

(Feet)

26 AWG (0.4 mm) wire size (

)

24 AWG (0.5 mm) wire size (

)

22 AWG (0.64 mm) wire size (

)

∅

1 pair

2 pairs

3 pairs

1 pair

2 pairs

3 pairs

1 pair

2 pairs

3 pairs

7.5

8.6

8.7

8.8

8.9

9.0

9.1

9.2

9.3

9.4

9.5

9.6

9.7

9.8

10.0

10.1

10.4

10.8

11.2

11.7

12.4

13.4

16.0

7.5

8.6

8.7

8.8

8.9

9.0

9.1

9.2

9.3

9.4

9.5

9.6

9.7

9.8

10.0

10.1

10.4

10.8

11.2

11.7

12.4

13.4

16.0

7.5

8.5

8.6

8.7

8.8

8.9

9.0

9.1

9.2

9.3

9.4

9.6

9.7

9.9

10.1

10.3

10.5

10.8

11.0

11.4

11.7

12.2

12.7

14.6

7.5

8.6

8.7

8.8

8.9

9.0

9.1

9.2

9.3

9.5

9.6

9.7

9.9

10.1

10.3

10.5

10.7

11.2

11.9

12.8

14.6

7.5

8.5

8.6

8.7

8.8

8.9

9.0

9.1

9.2

9.3

9.5

9.6

9.7

9.9

10.1

10.3

10.5

10.7

10.9

11.2

11.5

11.9

12.8

14.6

7.5

8.5

8.7

8.6

164

9.0

8.7

8.8

8.6

246

9.3

8.8

9.0

8.6

328

9.6

9.0

9.2

8.6

410

10.0

9.1

9.4

8.6

492

10.4

9.3

9.6

8.7

574

11.0

9.4

9.8

8.7

656

11.7

9.6

10.1

8.7

738

12.9

9.8

10.4

8.8

820

16.0

10.0

10.8

8.8

902

10.2

11.2

8.8

984

10.4

11.7

8.9

1066

1148

1230

1312

1476

1640

1804

1968

2132

2296

2460

2624

2788

2952

3116

3280

3608

3936

4264

4592

4920

5248

5576

5904

10.7

12.4

8.9

11.0

13.4

8.9

11.3

16.0

9.0

11.7

9.0

12.9

9.1

16.0

9.2

9.3

9.4

9.5

9.6

9.7

9.8

9.9

10.0

10.1

10.4

10.7

11.0

11.4

11.9

12.4

13.2

14.6

Table 4–4 Power Consumption (Watts) of Base Stations and Cabling when Powered with 48V

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw

4-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Configuration Directions, Base Station Powering

4.5

Alternative for Calculating the Power Consumption per Base Station

In Figure 4–4 the power consumption of the Base Station and the cabling is given as a function of

the cable length in terms of percentage. This relation is almost independent of the number of cable

pairs, cable resistance and supply voltage. Table 4–5 also gives this relation in steps of 5 percent.

The table can be used as follows.

7 5

100%

Maximum cable length

Fig. 4–4 Power Consumption from Power Supply Related to Cable Length

Example

supply voltage

: 48V

number of EPP (Express Powering Pairs) : 0

wire size

length

: 24 AWG (R =0.055 /m)

: 820 ft.

With this information the maximum cable length can be read from Table 4–2. The maximum length

can also be calculated using the formulas in Paragraph 4.4. When using these formulas, you must

use n=2 for the number of pairs (2 data pairs, no express powering pairs). With both methods the

result is 2763ft.

The length of the cable is (820/2763) 100%+29.7% of the maximum cable length. Round up this

value (30%) and read the dissipated power from Table 4–5. The dissipated power is 8.3W.

4-8

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Relative length

x (in %)

Total power consumption

(Watt)

7.5

7.7

100

7.8

7.9

8.0

8.1

8.3

8.4

8.6

8.7

8.9

9.1

9.3

9.5

9.8

10.1

10.4

10.9

11.5

12.3

15.0

Table 4–5 Power Consumption Related to Cable Length

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw

4-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Configuration Directions, Base Station Powering

4-10

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Configuration Directions, Traffic Capacity of the System

CHAPTER 5

Traffic Capacity of the System

The traffic capacity of the DCT1900 system is mainly determined by the RE and in exceptional

cases also by the Base Stations. The RE can handle a maximum of 60 simultaneous calls, and a

single Base Station has a capacity of 8 simultaneous calls.

5.1

Traffic Capacity of the Radio Exchange

The traffic capacity of the RE is determined by:

Total traffic (Erlang)

The GOS accepted by the customer.

The number of speech circuits available, with a limit of 60.

Erlang is a measurement of telphone traffic. One Erlang is equal to one full hour of use, or 60 x 60

= 3,600 seconds of phone conversation. You convert CCS (hundred call seconds) into Erlangs by

dividing by 36.

The GOS is the probability that a call cannot be made because of congestion in the system. The

customer has to indicate which GOS is acceptable. A GOS of 1%, or 0.01, means an average of 1

blocked call in every 100 calls.

SPU and SLU boards provide for 8 speech circuits. When a total of 8 SPU and SLU boards are

installed, then 64 circuits are available, of which only 60 can be used simultaneously, as the

DCT1900 system can handle only a maximum of 60 simultaneous calls.

The two parameters mentioned above (GOS and number of speech circuits) and the total amount

of traffic (Erlang) that is required are related to each other. Table 5–1 below shows how these

parameters are related for certain values. This table is used to calculate from a given GOS and

Erlang value the number of SPUs/SLUs needed. The Erlang value is the total traffic generated by

all Portable Telephone users (including visiting Portable Telephone users) in the coverage area of

the system.

GOS (GOS)

Number of

SPUs/SLUs

Speech

circuits

(1/50)

0.5%

0.1%

(1/1000)

(1/100)

(1/200)

3.6

9.8

3.2

2.7

8.1

2.1

6.7

8.9

16.6

23.8

31.0

38.4

45.9

49.7

15.3

22.1

29.0

36.1

43.3

46.9

14.2

20.6

27.3

34.2

41.2

44.8

12.2

18.2

24.5

30.9

37.5

40.8

Table 5–1 Erlang Table–B values for given GOS and Number of Speech Circuits

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw/

5-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Configuration Directions, Traffic Capacity of the System

As a RE can handle only as many simultaneous calls as the number of available speech circuits

while the number of Portable Telephones in the respective coverage area can be as many as 600,

a lack of speech circuits may occur in some occasions. To limit these occurrences, take into

account the number of regular (home) Portable Telephone users plus the maximum number of

visiting Portable Telephone users at a certain time while determining the required traffic capacity.

Table 5–2 shows what Erlang values mean in call–minutes for a Portable Telephone.

mErlang

Minutes per hour

mErlang

Minutes per hour

250

300

500

750

100

150

200

Table 5–2 Erlang Values Expressed in Call–Minutes

Example: A customer ordering a system that can handle 55 Portable Telephones (local users

and visiting users), generating 200 mE each in average, requires a system with a

traffic capacity of 11 E. With an accepted GOS of 0.5% the number of SPUs/SLUs is

found as follows:

The total traffic is 11 E. In the column of 0.5% GOS, the next higher value of 11 E is

14.2 E, resulting in 3 SPUs/SLUs.

So, the system should be equipped with 3 SPUs/SLUs, offering the client 14.2 E

instead of 11. This means that the system has an over–capacity 3.2 E, which allows

expansion of the system with 16 Portable Telephones without reducing the GOS or the

need of more SPUs or SLUs.

According to Table 5–1 60 circuits with an accepted GOS of 0.5% result in a maximum traffic

capacity of the system of 44.8 E. When each Portable Telephone generates 150 mE in average,

the system has a capacity of serving approximately 300 Portable Telephones.

5.2

Traffic Capacity of the Base Stations

The total traffic that is being generated by all Portable Telephones (visiting Portable Telephones

included) of the system should be in accordance with the capacity of the cordless network as well.

A Base Station, having 8 channels available, has an Erlang value of 2.7 with a GOS of 0.5%. This

value can be read from the Table 5-1. This means that each Base Station can serve 18 Portable

Telephones, assuming that Portable Telephones generate 150 mE each during busy hours (13.5

Portable Telephones if 200 mE each).

Example: Suppose that in the building of the customer in the example in paragraph 5.1, full

coverage can be achieved by 4 Base Stations. This means that all Portable

Telephones generate together 55 x 0.200 = 11 E, while the Base Stations traffic

capacity is only 4 x 2.7 = 10.8 Erlang. This is too little. This discrepancy can be solved

by adding another Base Station near the busiest part of the building.

From an average point of view, the total capacity offered by the cordless network is generally more

than sufficient. In certain places, traffic demands may vary such that locally the network is often

blocking, or has a lower GOS than required. For instance, a purchasing department may easily

generate 300 mE per Portable Telephone during a busy hour, with 6 persons giving a very high

5-2

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Configuration Directions, Traffic Capacity of the System

load on the Base Station close by. It may be necessary to add a Base Station in this area to have

enough capacity for others to call as well.

5.3

Traffic Capacity of the System

The traffic capacity limitations of both the RE and the cordless network are discussed on the

previous page. A user making calls will first face a blocking chance by the cordless network and

then face another blocking chance by the system. These two parameters are statistically

independent and should therefore be summed to find the overall blocking probability of the

system.

When an overall GOS of 0.5% is required, the system must be configured such that the GOS of

the RE summed with the GOS of the network together result in a GOS of 0.5%.

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw/

5-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Configuration Directions, Traffic Capacity of the System

5-4

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Configuration Directions, Relation between Parts

CHAPTER 6

Relation between Parts

Radio Exchange

Item

Connects

Remarks

Modular Cabinet

9 System Boards

1 Connection Board

2 Power Supplies

Number of System Boards may be less due to

power limitations. Up to 4 cabinets can be chained.

An MCCB is factory mounted.

CPU

SLU

PC, Printer, General Alarm, SMS

and PWT air interface

synchronization signals

Only 1 per system (also with a multi–cabinet

system).

CPU/SDB synchronization cables.

Note: Sync Kit required for each CPU. FPGA

must be installed.

8 calls

An SLU consists of an SPU part and a CLU part.

The SLU can be combined with SPU and CLU

boards.

8 Base Stations

The SPU part provides for 8 speech paths. The CLU

part can connect 8 Base Stations.

CLU/MDF Cables and CLU/MCCB Power cables.

Quantity depends on required traffic capacity and

GOS.

DTU-E1, CCS

DTU-T1, CCS

60 simultaneous calls

46 simultaneous calls

Two 2–Mbit links, each link having 30 channels to

which Portable Telephones are assigned

dynamically. The maximum number of Portable

Telephones depends on the GOS and the traffic

capacity of the RE configuration (1 per RE)

Two 1.544-Mbits, each link having 23 channels to

which Portable Telephones are assigned

dynamically. The maximum number of Portable

Telephones depends on the GOS and the traffic

capacity of the RE configuration (1 or 2 per RE).

DTU-E1, CAS

DTU-T1, CAS

60 individual extensions

48 individual extensions

Two 2–Mbit links, each link having 30 channels to

which Portable Telephones are assigned on a

dedicated basis. (Max. 10 per system)

Two 1.544-Mbits, each link having 24 channels to

which Portable Telephones are assigned on a

dedicated basis. (Max. 13 per system)

LTU

DLU

8 PBX lines (analog, 2 wires)

12 PBX lines (1:1 digital lines)

LTU/MDF Cable Set- 1 cable supports 3 LTUs . A

maximum of 272 Portable Telephones supported.

DLU/PBX Cable Set- 1 cable supports 2 DLUs. Each

DLU supports 12 Portable Telephones.

CLU

8 Base Stations – 2.2 miles

8 Base Stations – 1.2 miles

8 calls

CLU/MDF Cables and CLU/MCCB power cables.

CLU-S

SPU

The SPU provides 8 speech paths. Quantity

depends on required traffice and GOS.

MCCB

3+7 CLU or 3+7 SLU power ports Modular Cabinet Connection Board

for Base Station power

PC, Printer/SMS and General

Alarm

SDB

1 input and 3 output PWT air

interface synchronization

connections

To be mounted on the bottom plate of the Modular

Cabinet.

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw

6-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Configuration Directions, Relation between Parts

Power Supplies

Items Modular Cabinet

Power Supply Unit

Connects

Remarks

Mains to Modular Cabinet.

Powers system boards and a maximum of 24 Base

Stations.

Cables

Items Modular Cabinet

CLU/MDF Cable or CLU/MDF 1 set per CLU or SLU

Cable, Long

A set consists of 2 cables with different cable clamp

positions. Normal version is 16 ft. Long version is 82 ft.

Connects 8 Base Stations to one 66 block.

CLU/MCCB Power Cable

1 per CLU or SLU

1 per DTU

Only when Base Stations are powered via the cabinet.

DTU/PBX Cable set (E1-

CCS or CAS)

A set consists of 2 cables with different cable clamp

positions.

DTU/PBX Cable Set

(T1-CCS or CAS)

1 per DTU

One cable with two connectors for two circuits.

LTU Cable Set

DLU Cable Set

PC Cable

1 per 3 LTUs

1 per 2 DLUs

1 per system

4 per CPU

Connects 24 extensions to one 66 block.

Connects 48 extensions to one 66 block.

Printer Cable

CPU/SDB Cables

SMS Cable

Part of the sync port installation set

Comes with SMS system

1 per Unit

Mains Power Cord

1 per Unit

Comes with power supply kit

6-2

Config-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions

Section 5

Installation Instructions

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Table of Contents

Table of Contents

CHAPTER 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

CHAPTER 2

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1

2.2

2.3

2.4

2.5

2.6

2.7

Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1

Safety and Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1

ESD Socket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Installation Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1

Equipment Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Miscellaneous Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Switch Room. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

CHAPTER 3

Modular Cabinet – Installation Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1

3.2

3.3

3.4

3.5

3.6

3.7

3.8

3.9

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Recommended Board Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Main Steps of Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3

Charging Portable Telephone Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Switching On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Board Position Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3

Cabinet Number Labels, Board Name Labels and Cable Position Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

CHAPTER 4

Modular Cabinet – REX-BAS9021 or BDVNB 101 01/2 or BDVNB 101 01/3 . . . . . 4-1

4.1

Contents of the Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Modular Cabinet BDVNB 101 01/2 and BDVNB 101 01/3 (r2 & r3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1

Modular Cabinet REX-BAS9021, REX-BAS9021A, REX-BAS9021/1B,REX-BAS9021/4B,

BDVNB 101 01/3(R4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1

Installation Area for the Modular Cabinet(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Parts of the Modular Cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Pre–mounting of a Modular Cabinet in a One Cabinet System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Pre–mounting of Modular Cabinets in a Multi Cabinet System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7

Installation of the Synchronization Distribution Board (Mobility System Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Mounting the Modular Cabinet(s) to the Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Connection to Protective Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Connection of Wrist Strap for ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

4.2

4.2.1

4.2.2

4.3

4.4

4.5

4.6

4.7

4.8

4.9

4.10

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Table of Contents

4.11

4.12

4.13

Interconnecting Modular Cabinets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Placing the Securing Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Add a Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

CHAPTER 5

Central Processing Unit (CPU) – REX-BRD0004 or 2/ROFNB 157 19/2 . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.1

5.2

5.3

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Board Description 5-1

Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5

CHAPTER 6

Central Processing Unit (CPU2) – REX-BRD9033, REX-BRD9034 . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.1

6.2

6.3

6.4

General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Board Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Board Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

CHAPTER 7

Cell Link Unit (CLU) – REX-BRD0014 or ROFNB 157 11/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.1

7.2

7.3

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Board Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

CHAPTER 8

Cell Link Unit (CLU-S) –REX-BRD0016 or ROFNB 157 16/2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8.1

8.2

8.3

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Board Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

CHAPTER 9

Speech Link Unit (SLU) – REX-BRD0015 or ROFNB 157 16/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

9.1

9.2

9.3

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Board Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

CHAPTER 10

Speech Processing Unit (SPU–S) – REX-BRD0017 or ROFNB 157 16/3 . . . . . . 10-1

10.1

10.2

10.3

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Board Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Table of Contents

CHAPTER 11

Digital Trunk Unit (DTU–E1) – REX-BRD0002 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/1. . . . . . . . . . 11-1

11.1

11.2

11.3

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Board Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

CHAPTER 12

Digital Trunk Unit (DTU-T1, CAS) - REX-BRD0021 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/2 . . . . . . 12-1

12.1

12.2

12.3

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Board Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

CHAPTER 13

Digital Trunk Unit (DTU-T1, CCS) - REX-BRD0025 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/3 . . . . . . 13-1

13.1

13.2

13.3

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Board Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

CHAPTER 14

Line Termination Unit (LTU) – REX-BRD0007 or ROFNB 157 02/6

and LTU2 - REX-BRD0019A or ROFNB 157 25/2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

14.1

14.2

14.3

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Board Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

CHAPTER 15

Digital Line Unit (DLU) - REX-BRD0023 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AWS1024 Meridian, AWS1025 Norstar, AWS1026 Lucent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

15.1

15.2

15.3

15.4

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

Board Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2

Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2

CHAPTER 16

Base Station – KRC 101 1371 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

16.1

16.2

16.3

I16.4

16.5

16.6

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

Base Station Cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3

Base Station Cable Delay Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4

nstallation Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6

Connecting the Base Station Plug to the Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6

Base Station Mounting - Indoor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

III

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Table of Contents

16.6.6.1 Wall Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7

16.6.2

16.6.6.3 Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-10

16.7 Base Station Mounting-Outdoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-12

Ceiling Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7

CHAPTER 17

Modular Cabinet Connection Board (MCCB) - ROANB 101 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1

17.1

17.2

Board Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4

CHAPTER 18

Synchronization Distribution Board (SDB) – REX-BRD0006 or ROANB 101 38 18-1

18.1

18.2

18.3

18.4

Board Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2

External Sync Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2

Sync Input Cable Delay Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3

CHAPTER 19

Modular Cabinet – Power Cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1

19.1

19.2

19.3

19.4

19.5

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1

Modular Cabinet - BDVNB 101 01/3 (R2, R3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4

Modular Cabinet - REX-BAS9021A/1B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-8

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-11

CHAPTER 20

Modular Cabinet – CPU Cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1

20.1

20.2

20.3

20.4

20.5

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1

CPU1 Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-2

Synchronization Data Board (SDB) replacement Cable (AWS1154) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5

CPU2 Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7

Mixing CPU1 and CPU2 Based Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10

CHAPTER 21

Modular Cabinet – CLU/SLU to Base Station Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1

21.1

21.2

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1

Installation of Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2

CHAPTER 22

Modular Cabinet – DTU Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1

22.1

22.2

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1

Installation - DTU-E1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Table of Contents

22.3

Installation - DTU-T1 (CAS or CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3

CHAPTER 23

Modular Cabinet – LTU Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1

23.1

23.2

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2

CHAPTER 24

Modular Cabinet – DLU Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1

24.1

24.2

24.3

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-1

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1

Connection to PBX’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-3

CHAPTER 25

Use of TDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1

25.1

25.2

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1

Determining the Delay of Remote Base Station Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1

CHAPTER 26

Modular Cabinet – Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1

26.1

Mains Power Cord - RPM 113 3563 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1

Power Cable Filter/Switch – TRENB 101 02. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1

MCCB Power Cable – TRENB 101 03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-2

Power Cable Switch/Fuse – TRENB 101 04. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-3

Power Cable Fuse/Backplane – TRENB 101 05. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-4

PC or SMS Cable – TSRNB 101 22D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-5

Printer Cable – TSRNB 101 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-6

CPU/MCCB Serial Connection Cable – TSRNB 101 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-7

General Alarm Cable – TSRNB 101 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26-9

CLU/MDF Cable Set – NTM/TSRNB 101 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-10

LTU/MDF Cable Set – NTM/TSRNB 101 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-14

CLU/MCCB Power Cable – TSRNB 101 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-15

CLU/MDF Cable Set, Long – NTM/TSRNB 101 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-15

CPU1/SDB Twisted Pair Sync Cable – TSRNB 101 48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-18

DTU Twisted Pair Cable Set – NTM/TSRNB 101 49 or AWS1033 (E1 - 120 ohm) . . . . . . 26-19

DTU/MDF Twisted Pair Cable – TSRNB 101 50 or AWS1034 (T1 - 100 ohm). . . . . . . . . . 26-20

SYNC Cable - TSR 951 284 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-21

26.2

26.3

26.4

26.5

26.6

26.7

26.8

26.9

26.10

26.11

26.12

26.13

26.14

26.15

26.16

26.17

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Table of Contents

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Introduction

CHAPTER 1

Introduction

This section describes how to install the DCT1900 system. It comprises information about required

tools, firmware, recommended board positions, cabling of system and power supplies, system

cabinets, Base Stations and field–replaceable units such as power supplies and System Boards.

This section is set–up in a modular format. Each component of the system is described in

separate chapters.

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

: Introduction

Introduces you to this document.

: General

Informs you about environmental conditions, ESD handling, tools and

other items you need for installation.

Chapter 3

: Installation steps for the Modular Cabinet

Gives all installation steps for the Modular Cabinet in sequence. For

more detailed information, references regarding certain aspects are

given to other chapters or other sections of the manual.

Chapter 4

: Modular Cabinet

Describes the mounting of the Modular Cabinet.

Chapters 5-15

: System Boards

CPU, CLU, CLU-S, SLU, SPU-S, DTU-E1(CAS, CCS),

DTU-T1(CAS,CCS), LTU, DLU.

Chapter 16

: Base Station

Chapters 17-18

: Connection Boards

MCCB and SDB

Chapters 19-24

: Cabling for the Modular Cabinet

Describes the installation of all cables for the Modular Cabinet.

Chapter 25

Chapter 26

: Use of TDR

: Modular Cabinet Cables

Describes all cables for the Modular Cabinet.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

1-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Introduction

1-2

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, General

CHAPTER 2

General

2.1

Environmental Requirements

The building (rooms) in which the RE and Base Stations are to be installed must comply with the

following:

The air shall be free from dust and smoke. It shall not contain gases or acid fumes that can

affect the condition of metal parts or insulation materials.

Relative humidity may vary between 20 – 90% for the Modular Cabinet. The temperature may

vary between 32°F and +104°F for the RE. The temperature may vary between -50°F and

+131°F for the Base Stations.

The equipment must not be exposed to direct sunlight due to the risk of overheating.

When Base Stations are to be mounted outdoors they must be mounted in an outdoor environ-

mentally sealed enclosure.

Every effort should be made to place the Base Stations and especially the RE in a "quiet" EMI

environment.

2.2

2.3

Safety and Regulatory Information

Before starting any installation, read Section 1, "Safety and Regulatory Information" in this manual.

This section contains important safety instructions.

ESD Socket

The cabinets are equipped with a banana plug socket to connect an anti–static wrist strap. When

the front cover has been removed, you can find this socket on the right upper edge of the power

switch bracket.

ATTENTION

Boards containing Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD) circuits are

indicated by the

sign. For handling these boards refer to the

section, "Safety and Regulatory Information" in this Manual.

2.4

Installation Tools

The following installation tools are required:

ESD wrist strap

multimeter

torx screwdrivers (T10, T20)

small straight slot screwdriver

wire stripper

needle nose pliers

cutting pliers

electric drill

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

2-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, General

equipment to measure the delay times of Base Station cables and external synchronization

cables-TDR

Siemens 66 block

punch down tool

2.5

2.6

Equipment Verification

Obtain a copy of the order that was placed for the system and verify the order against the shipping

forms found on the boxes containing all the DCT1900 equipment.

Miscellaneous Items

Check that the following additional items are available:

Base Station cables (see Chapter 16, Paragraph 16.2)

RJ45 plugs and crimper for Base Stations

Material for external sync cables as specified in Chapter 18, Paragraph 18.2 if PWT air

interface synchronization is required in a multi DCT1900 system environment.

IBM compatible personal computer as specified in Installer’s Quick Guide (CSMW)

Epson compatible printer (optional)

#10-12 gauge wire to connect the Modular Cabinet to protective ground.

2.7

Switch Room

Verify that there is an adequate wall space to mount the equipment. Verify the locations and

availability of adequate power and earth ground.

2-2

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – Installation Steps

CHAPTER 3

Modular Cabinet – Installation Steps

3.1

Introduction

Paragraph 3.2 describes the recommended board positions. This paragraph should be read

before starting any installation.

Paragraph 3.3 describes the main steps of installation and the order in which they should be

carried out. It can be used by inexperienced engineers, or experienced engineers as a reference

or check–list. Each step refers to a chapter where more information can be found.

Paragraphs 3.4 through 3.9 contain installation procedures which are not related to specific units

described in other chapters.

3.2

Recommended Board Positions

Recommendations are given for the system board positions below. These rules are given to

facilitate proper framing synchronization, avoid crossing of cables and to ensure sufficient length

of the dedicated cables.

front view

24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56

Indicates that the CPU is required to be in this

position in cabinet 1

The board position numbers are not indicated on the rack unless

the labels are installed.

Fig. 3–1 Recommended Board Positions

CPU

The CPU is always placed at the farthest left position in the cabinet. In a multi cabinet

configuration the CPU must be placed in cabinet 1 (refer to Figure 4-1 in Chapter 4).

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

3-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – Installation Steps

CLUs/SLUs

CLUs and SLUs are placed on the right hand side of the cabinet. In this position CLU/MDF cables

do not influence the accessibility of the MCCB.

SPUs

SPUs are placed in the middle of the cabinet.

DLUs/DTUs

DTUs/LTUs/DLUs are placed on the left hand side of the cabinet next to the CPU. If both DLUs

and DTUs are used, it is recommended that the DLU be placed closest to the CPU.

LTUs

LTUs should be placed in the cabinet from left to right in groups of three. One LTU/MDF cable is

designed to support three LTU boards installed side by side.

Note:

CLU/SLU, SPU, LTU, DTU and DLU boards will work in any position in the cabinet.

3.3

Main Steps of Installation

Installing Directly to the Wall

1. Unpack the system (except system boards). See Paragraph 3.4

2. Charge Portable Telephone batteries. See Paragraph 3.5

3. Pre–mount the Modular Cabinet(s). See Paragraph 4.5 or 4.6

4. Install SDB if required. See Paragraph 4.7

5. Place the board position label. See Paragraph 3.8

6. Mount the Modular Cabinet(s). See Paragraph 4.8

7. If applicable interconnect Modular Cabinets. See Paragraph 4.11

8. Connect protective earth ground to the cabinet. See Paragraph 4.9

9. Install the power cabling of the cabinet. See Chapter 19, Power Cabling

10. Connect the static strap. See Paragraph 4.10

11. Install the system boards. See Chapters 5 to 14

12. Install the cabling. See Chapters 6 to 18

13. Mount the Base Stations and test the Base

Station cables. See Chapter 16

14. Switch on the DCT1900 system. See Paragraph 3.6

3-2

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – Installation Steps

15. Initialize the DCT1900 system. See "CSM Installer’s Quick Guide (Appendix I)

16. Place the securing bar. See Paragraph 4.12

17. Place the cabinet number labels, board name

labels and cable position labels. See Paragraph 3.8 & 3.9.

18. Commissioning. See Section 6, "Commissioning"

3.4

3.5

3.6

Unpacking

The system is delivered in several cardboard boxes. To unpack, do the following:

1. Read ESD instructions in Section 1 "Safety and Regulatory Information".

2. Open the cardboard boxes and take out the shipping list.

3. Check the contents of the boxes with the shipping list .

4. Report any discrepancies or damages to cabinet(s) or board(s).

Charging Portable Telephone Batteries

After installation the system must be tested with the Portable Telephones. Charge the batteries

prior to installation to avoid flat batteries. Charging the batteries completely takes some time

depending on the type of the charger. Refer to the DT600 Portable User Guide - LZB 119 2665,

DT620 Portable User Guide - LZT 123 3105 or 9p23 User Guide - AWS1090 for battery charging

instructions.

Switching On/Off

Note:

Simultaneous switching on of cabinets will result in erroneous system start–up.

Multi Cabinet Configuration

Power on: first switch on all cabinets except cabinet 1 and then switch on cabinet 1.

Power off: first switch off cabinet 1 and then switch off the other cabinets.

Base Stations Powered via PW-EXT

Base Stations can be switched on prior to the cabinet or vice-versa.

Printer

When the RE is reset or switched on, always press the on–line button of the printer at least twice

so that the printer is on–line. The RE will only detect a printer if a change from on–line to off–line

state is received.

3.7

3.8

Labels

With each cabinet, a label sheet is delivered containing labels of all system board names, cabinet

numbers, board positions and cable positions.

Board Position Label

The board position label can be placed on the leading edge of the shelf below the system boards

as indicated in Figure 3–2. The label should be placed before installing the cabling.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

3-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – Installation Steps

Note:

The board position label should not be placed on the leading edge at the top of the cabinet for this

will isolate the enclosure EMI shielding.

Board Position label

Fig. 3–2 Position of the Board Position Label

3.9

Cabinet Number Labels, Board Name Labels and Cable Position Labels

Label each item with the corresponding label after installation is completed. Labelling cables is

important to avoid misconnection of cables after maintenance has been carried out.

The cable position labels indicate the board position and the position of the connector where the

plug is connected. Figure 3–3 gives the standard connector positions on all boards (position 1–4)

and two examples of the labeling. If more than one position is used by the plug, mark the plug with

the lower position used.

3-4

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – Installation Steps

No label

48/3

24/3

24/2

48/1

CLU at board position 48

CPU at board position 24

Fig. 3–3 Connector Positions and Examples of Cable Labelling

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

3-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – Installation Steps

3-6

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – REX-BAS9021 or BDVNB 101 01/2

CHAPTER 4

Modular Cabinet – REX-BAS9021 or BDVNB 101 01/2

or BDVNB 101 01/3

4.1

Contents of the Box

The cardboard box in which the Modular Cabinet is shipped contains the cabinet itself and the

following material:

1 mounting bracket.

a bag with modular cabinet mounting material:

cabinet mounting material:

- screws (∅5 30),

tie–wraps,

M3 x 6 screws with torx heads for cable clamps,

M4 x 6 screws with torx heads and washers for protective ground cable.

labels

Note:

The bag may contain more material than actually needed.

4.2

Fuses

4.2.1 Modular Cabinet BDVNB 101 01/2 and BDVNB 101 01/03 (R2 & R3)

Has 4 fuses

2 fuses located on the MCCB on the bottom of the cabinet (Figure 4-2)

Replace these (4) fuses only with UL listed 250V 15A fuse.

Ascom Part Number: 7006100123

4.2.2 Modular Cabinet REX-BAS9021, REX-BAS9021A,

REX-BAS9021/1B, REX-BAS9021/4B, BDVNB 101 01/3 (R4)

Has 6 fuses

2 Fuses located on the MCCB on the botom of the cabinet (Figure 4-2)

2 Fuses located on the bottom of the new power switch bracket (Figure 4-3)

Replace these (4) fuses only with UL listed 250V 15A fuses.

2 fuses located on the top of the new power switch bracket (Figure 4-3)

Replace these (2) fuses only with the UL listed 250V 3A fuses.

These fuses are common parts and maybe purchased from various vendors.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

4-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, or BDVNB 101 01/3

4.3

Installation Area for the Modular Cabinet(s)

Do not mount the cabinet to drywall using plastic drywall plugs. Recommended mounting of

the Modular Cabinet(s) is to a plywood back board which is securely mounted to the wall in the

switch room. The plywood board should be a minimum of 1/2" thick and be secured to the wall

by the appropriate hardware (i.e. toggle bolts, wood, or sheet metal screws, depending on the

stud types) to ensure that the plywood will support the weight of the cabinets with all cards and

cables installed.

The RE may consist of up to 4 Modular Cabinets. The Modular Cabinets must be mounted

next to each other (see Figure 4–1).

The Modular Cabinet(s) must be mounted to the wall at a position where they are easily

accessible for installation and maintenance of the system. Take into consideration that the

number of cabinets may be expanded in the future.

The Modular Cabinet(s) should be mounted at the normal working height. The lower edge of

the Modular Cabinet(s) should be about 5.25 ft. above the floor.

Above the Modular Cabinet(s) there should be at least 4" free space for air circulation.

Modular Cabinets must be separated approximately 1/8" from each other.

Do not mount anything within 1.5 ft. of the bottom of the cabinets to allow the bottom plate to

swing down and to allow for cable entry from the bottom of the cabinet. See Fig. 4–1

Installation of the Modular Cabinet(s)

Do not mount the cabinet(s) over flammable surfaces.

4-2

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, or BDVNB 101 01/3

Ceiling

Mounting Bracket

Approx.

1 3/4 in

minimum

4 in

Approx.

3 3/4 in

6 1/2 in

Cabinet 3

(Cabinet 4)

Cabinet 1

(Cabinet 3)

Cabinet 2

(Cabinet 1)

Cabinet 4

(Cabinet 2)

15 3/8"

8 7/8 in

1/8 in x d x 1/4 in

5.25 ft

42 in

Floor

Notes:

•

The mounting brackets are drawn above the cabinets. When the cabinets are mounted to the wall,

the mounting brackets are not visible.

•

An alternative cabinet numbering is given between parentheses.

A typical sheet of plywood (48” wide) will hold all four cabinets.

All cable entrances are from the bottom.

The cabinet with the CPU board is always cabinet 1.

Fig. 4-1 Installation of the Modular Cabinet(s)

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

4-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, or BDVNB 101 01/3

4.4

Parts of the Modular Cabinet

Figure 4–2 shows a drawing of the Modular Cabinet and its most important parts.

Bottom view

SDB that must be installed in the same

cabinet as the CPU (Mobility Only)

MCCB

Terminal block for Power

connection of the cabinet

Left side view

Front view

Backplane

Power on/off switch

Fuses

Wrist strap

connector

Power filter

Drawer

Fig. 4–2 Modular Cabinet (BDVNB 101 01/2 & BDVNB 101 01/03)

4-4

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Left Side View

Front View

Fuse

wrist strap

connector

power on/off

switch

Fuse

Fig. 4-3 Modular Cabinet(REX-BAS9021) Power Switch Assembly

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

4-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, or BDVNB 101 01/3

4.5

Pre–mounting of a Modular Cabinet in a One Cabinet System

1. Refer to paragrah 4.4.

2. Remove the front cover of the cabinet (see Figure 4–4):

Remove the screws that secure the cover (1).

Lift the front cover approximately 3/8” (2).

Remove the cover by lifting the lower edge towards you (3).

conductive tape

or break-out plate

Front Cover

Drawer

Fig. 4–4 Removal of the Front Cover and the Drawer

3. Remove the drawer for easy installation:

Open the drawer by pulling it toward you (4).

Release the drawer by pulling the left or right hand side of the drawer down as indicated in

Figure 4–4 (5) and remove the drawer (6). The drawer is hinged by the two screws on its

sides. These do not need to be removed to take the drawer out. Replace the two front

cover screws so that they do not get lost.

4. Remove the screw of the securing bar at the front of the Modular Cabinet and remove the

securing bar. Replace the screw so it does not get lost.

5. Secure the mounting bracket to the wall, so that the bottom side of the Modular Cabinet is

about 5.25 ft. above the ground using the appropriate hardware (typically #8 wood or sheet

metal screws). See Fig. 4-1.

6. Hang the cabinet onto the mounting bracket and mark the location of the two retaining holes

on the bottom of the cabinet.

7. Remove the cabinet and drill the lower mounting holes as needed.

8. Continue with Paragraphs 4.8 or 4.9 as needed.

4-6

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

4.6

Pre–mounting of Modular Cabinets in a Multi Cabinet System

When a system consists of two to four Modular Cabinets, the Modular Cabinets have to be

interconnected using an interconnection set for the Modular Cabinet. In this paragraph only the

shielding gasket of the interconnection set is discussed. The use of the other items of the

interconnection set is described in Paragraph 4.11. Refer to paragraph 4.4.

1.Remove the cover of the cabinet (see Figure 4–4):

Loosen the screws that secure the cover (1).

Lift the front cover approximately 3/8" (2).

Remove the cover by lifting the lower edge towards you (3).

2. Remove the drawer for easy installation:

Open the drawer by pulling it towards you (4).

Release the drawer by pulling the lower side of the Modular Cabinet as indicated in Figure

4–4 (5) and remove the drawer (6). Replace the two front cover screws so that they do

not get lost.

3. Remove the screw of the securing bar at the front of the Modular Cabinet and remove the

securing bar. Replace the screw so it does not get lost.

4. Remove the conductive tape or break–out plates in the side panels that are going to be

positioned next to the other cabinet’s side panels.

5. Place the shielding gaskets as indicated in Figure 4–5.

6. Using the appropriate hardware (typically #8 wood or sheet metal screws), secure the

mounting bracket to the wall, so that the bottom side of the Modular Cabinet is about 5.25 ft.

above the ground. See Fig. 4-1.

7. Hang the cabinet onto the mounting bracket and mark the location of the two retaining holes

on the bottom of the cabinet.

8. Remove the cabinet and drill the lower mounting holes as needed.

9. Repeat this procedure for the other cabinets. The cabinets must be placed against each other,

so that the shielding gasket will always have good contact with each other. For Modular

Cabinets with revisions R2 and R3 the distance adjustment plate can be used (see Figure 4–

6). (The space between the cabinets should never be more than .125".)

10. Continue with Paragraphs 4.7 or 4.8 as needed.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

4-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, or BDVNB 101 01/3

Outer surface

of cabinet

A * A

2 Shielding Gaskets

Fig. 4–5 Placement of the Shielding Gaskets

Distance adjustment plate

Mounting Bracket

Fig. 4-6 Spacing the Mounting Brackets of the Modular Cabinets

4.7

Installation of the Synchronization Distribution Board (Mobility System

Only)

Note: Not required in cabinets using CPU2 boards

The SDB must be installed in the Modular Cabinet that will contain the CPU. The best way to

install the SDB is to have the cabinet on a desk on its back and with the drawer removed. For

mounting the SDB the following material is required:

4-8

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Sync port installation set: NTMNB 101 107

SDB

Two spacers

Two spring washers

Torx screwdriver nr. 20

Follow the next steps for mounting the SDB:

1. Unscrew the left fixation screw of the mains switch bracket (refer to Figure 4–2 for the location

and orientation).

2. Insert a spacer in the left side screw hole and tighten the spacer using a Torx screwdriver.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the right side screw.

4. Mount the SDB as indicated in Figure 4–7 and tighten screws (maximum torque 0.59 lb./ft.).

Bottom plate

Modular Cabinet

Spacer

SDB

Spring washer

Torx screw

Fig. 4–7 Mounting of the Synchronization Distribution Board

4.8

Mounting the Modular Cabinet(s) to the Wall

1. Hang the Modular Cabinet(s) up using the mounting bracket(s). In a multi cabinet

configuration, the cabinets must be placed against each other, so that the shielding gasket will

always make good contact with each other.

2. Secure the cabinet(s) to the wall by inserting and fastening the screws at the bottom of the

cabinet(s).

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

4-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, or BDVNB 101 01/3

4.9

Connection to Protective Ground

The Modular Cabinet must always be connected to PBX ground or protective ground.

1. Connect the protective ground to the ground terminal screw lug on the ground strip

(see Figure 4–8) of one of the cabinets, using a #10-#12 gauge wire ground cable.

Protective ground

connections

Fig. 4–8 Ground Plate

Warning

To prevent the ground connection from contact corrosion, only a

tinned ground lug should be connected to the ground strip.

4-10

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

4.10 Connection of Wrist Strap for ESD

After mounting the Modular Cabinet(s), the installer has to protect against damaging system

boards by ESD. The installer must use a wrist strap which must be connected to the cabinet at the

connector indicated in Figure 4–2 and Figure 4-3.

Note:

The Modular Cabinet must be connected to protective ground.

Flat Cable

R-network

R201, R202

and R207

R-network

R401, R402

and R407

Protective Ground Cable

R-network installed

R-network removed

Fig. 4-9 Example of Interconnecting the System Bus and the Ground Plates

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

4-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, or BDVNB 101 01/3

X102

X112

X113

Fig. 4-10 Backplane of Modular Cabinet

4.11 Interconnecting Modular Cabinets

After the Modular Cabinets have been mounted to the wall, the backplanes of the cabinets have to

be interconnected using the flat ribbon cable from the interconnection set, NTMNB 101 105 (see

Figure 4-9). Install one end of the cable in one of the cabinets. Feed the other end of the cable

through the sides of the cabinets and insert it into the connector on the back plane. Make sure the

connector’s latch closes.

Ensure that an earth ground has been run to cabinet #1 (see Figure 4-8). Take the green/yellow

ground cable from the interconnection set and connect the cable from the ground plate of the first

cabinet to the ground plate of the second cabinet. Continue connecting the ground cables to the

third and fourth cabinets as they are installed (see Figure 4-9).

The system bus on the backplane is terminated on both sides with R–networks in a SIL socket.

When the Modular Cabinets are connected together, R–networks must be present only at both

ends of the extended bus (see Figure 4–9).

4-12

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Procedure

1.If the system boards are already installed, temporarily remove the boards that block access to

the R–networks.

Note:

Follow paragraph 4.10 for ESD.

2. Remove all R–networks (R201, 202, 207, 401, 402, & 407) from the backplanes with the

exception of:

R201, R202 and R207 on the last cabinet on the right.

R401, R402 and R407 on the last cabinet on the left.

See Figure 4–9.

See Figure 4–10 for the exact placement of the R–networks.

3. Where system boards have been removed, re–insert the boards.

4.12 Placing the Securing Bar

After all system boards have been placed in the cabinet(s), mount the securing bar(s) as shown in

Figure 4–11.

Fig. 4–11 Placement of the Securing Bar

4.13 Add a Cabinet

Adding a cabinet to an existing sytem requires planning to assure a successful addition with

minimal downtime and problems. Both software and hardware changes need to be made to the

existing system during the upgrade procedure.

Read the entire procedure before starting this operation!

There are some special things to take into account for the addition of a cabinet.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

4-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, or BDVNB 101 01/3

Any cabinet needs to have a minimum of two circuit boards installed in it for the power supply

to operate correctly.

If your new cabinet is ordered with only one circuit board, then you need to plan on moving

another circuit board out of an existng cabinet. This may entail moving cables. Any

movement of existing boards should be done after the cabinet is added and the system is back

on line.

What board(s) are you placing in the new cabinet and what slots are they going into? Refer to

Section 5, Chapter 3.2.

Watch the power consumption totals for the backplane in each cabinet. Refer to Section 4,

Chapter 2.2.

When am I going to do this? Downtime needs to be scheduled for this operation. Allow plenty

of time and let all users know the schedule.

You will be removing termination resistors and knockout plates. The rule is "Where two

cabinets touch, remove the termination resistors and knockout plates in both cabinets at that

point."

Pre-planning Questions

Where do you physically add the new cabinet? On which side of the existing cabinet(s) do you

install the new cabinet?

Examine your current system and compare it to Figure 4-1. Are you adding cabinet 2, or 3, or

4? Plan to add your new cabinet in the location identified in this figure. Make sure the

appropriate location on the wall is cleared out for the new cabinet.

Where will the power supply(s) for the new cabinet be mounted?

Power supply should not be mounted directly beneath cabinets because the heat from the

power supply will rise directly into the cabinet. Mount them off to the side of the cabinets or at

least 3 feet below the cabinets.

Where will the additional LTU/CLU/SLU/DTU blocks be mounted?

66 blocks should not be mounted directly beneath the bottom of the cabinets as the blocks will

interfere with the drop down bottom of the cabinet and you might short something out on the

block. Leave as least a foot or two of free space below the cabinets.

How will the LTU/CLU/SLU/DTU cables be routed?

All cables coming into or out of the cabinets come out of the bottom of the cabinets. Leave

enough free space under the cabinets to form and route the cables to their termination point

4-14

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

The actual operation of adding a cabinet takes place in two steps, before the scheduled downtime

and during the scheduled downtime. Before the scheduled downtime you can:

Prepare the new cabinet.

Hang the mounting bracket for the new cabinet.

Once this is done and you are at the scheduled downtime you can:

Add the new cabinet via CSMW.

Power down the existing cabinets.

Mount the new cabinet.

Power the system back up.

Testing and back up.

Preparing the new cabinet

Once the new cabinet location has been decided, you must prepare for installation. For the

purpose of this discussion, we are adding a second cabinet to an existing one cabinet system.

The following procedure works for this or a third or a fourth cabinet. The only differences will be

which side of the backplane and cabinet you will be working with.

We will be adding the second cabinet to the right hand side of cabinet #1 as you look at cabinet

#1.

Unpack the new cabinet. Make sure you get the bracket. It is in a plastic bag on the top of the

packaging. Once you take the cabinet out of the plastic bag, remove the labels from the back

of the cabinet.

Remove the front cover, bottom plate, and card retention bar. Keep the covers, bar, and

screws together.

Lay the cabinet on its back and examine the backplane. Since the left side of the new cabinet

is going up against cabinet #1, this is the side we are interested in.

Locate the (3) termination resistors, R401, R402, and R407 on the backplane. Refer to

Figures 4-9 and 4-10. With a pair of needle nose pliers pull the resistor packs up off the

sockets on the backplane. DO THIS CAREFULLY. Save the resistors.

Locate the knockout plate on the left side of the new cabinet. Refer to Figure 4-4. Remove

this plate. DO THIS CAREFULLY. It is recommended that you use a fine tip pair of cutters to

cut the plate out.

Open the interconnect kit, NTMBN 101 05. Remove (2) of the metal shielding gaskets, refer to

Figure 4-5, and install them into the knockout hole on the side of the new cabinet.

Place the card slot label along the bottom of the cabinet directly below the card guides.

Place the cabinet label along the top edge of the cabinet above the card guides.

At this point, it might be a good idea to verify that the power wiring of the cabinet is correct. Take

one of the power supplies for the new cabinet and hook it up to the terminal block on the bottom of

the cabinet. Refer to Figure 19-2 for connection information.

Turn the power supply on and measure the voltage of the terminal block. The voltage should

be -48VDC.

If the voltage is correct, turn the cabinet power switch on. Measure the voltage on the terminal

block again.

Turn the cabinet power switch off.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

4-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, or BDVNB 101 01/3

Insert a circuit board into the cabinet in any slot. Turn the cabinet power switch on. If

everything is all right, then a green LED at the very top of the circuit board should be lit. Ignore

any other LEDs.

Turn off the cabinet power switch and remove the circuit board. Turn off the power supply and

disconnect the cabinet power supply.

The new cabinet is ready to be mounted.

Hang the mounting bracket for the new cabinet.

Normally the mounting brackets for the cabinets are all mounted at the same time. Since we are

adding a cabinet to an existing installation, we do not have that luxury. There are two ways to

mount the new bracket.

Method 1 - This can only be done when the system is shut down.

When cabinet 1 is shut down, remove it from the bracket on the wall. Use the spacer off of the

new bracket, See Figure 4-6, and spot the screw holes for the new bracket.

Drill new holes for the new bracket and secure it to the wall.

Replace cabinet number 1 on its bracket and secure it to the wall.

Method 2 - Done while existing system is running.

Measure from the top right hand corner of cabinet one, 1 7/8" over and 7/8" down. This is the

spot for the left hand mounting bracket screw. Place the new bracket on the wall, center the

left hand mounting hole over the mark you just made, level the bracket, and mark the center of

the right hand mounting hole.

Drill the holes for the screws and secure the bracket to the wall.

Do not mount the new cabinet !

SCHEDULE DOWN TIME!!!!

Add the new cabinet via CSMW.

Before the new cabinet is physically added, it must be added in the CSM software.

Connect the maintenance PC to the system and start the CSM program.

Back up the existing system.

Change the authority level to Distributor.

Go to System-Configuration-System tab.

Change the number of cabinets to 2. (2 in our example)

Click OK.

Reset the system via CSMW or by using the black reset button on the CPU board.

After the system comes back up, log back on the system, and verify that it says 2 cabinets.

Back the system up again. Give the back up a new name.

Power down the existing cabinet(s)

Power down the existing system.

4-16

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Remove any circuit boards in the three slots next to the side of the existing cabinet that is

going up against the new cabinet. For our example, this would be slots 48, 52, and slot 56.

Remember what you pulled out and label them.

Remove the (3) termination resistors, R201, R202, and R207, from the right hand side of the

backplane. Refer to Figures 4-9 and 4-10. DO THIS CAREFULLY. Save the resistors.

Remove the knockout plate from the right hand side of the existing cabinet. See Fig. 4-4. DO

THIS CAREFULLY.

Take the remaining two metal shielding gaskets from the installation kit, NTMNB 101 05, and

insert them into the hole whre the knockout plate was.

Mount the new cabinet

Hang the new cabinet on the bracket on the wall. Position it to the right hand side of the

bracket. This should give you enough room between the brackets so that the shielding

brackets do not interfere with each other as you set the new cabinet against the wall.

Once the new cabinet is on the bracket, push it up against the existing cabinet as close as

possible. This will compress the fingers of the shielding gaskets.

While holding the new cabinet up against the existing cabinet, mark the location of the two

mounting holes on the bottom of the new cabinet.

Drill the holes and secure the new cabinet to the wall with screws.

Remove the green ground wire from the installation kit, NTMNB 101 05, and connect it

between the grounding plates of the new and existing cabinets. See Figure 4-8.

Take the flat ribbon cable from the installation kit, NTMNB 101 05, and feed it GENTLY

through the knockout holes between the cabinets. The connectors on this cable are keyed.

Look at the cable before you feed it through. Make sure you have it oriented correctly.

Gently seat the connectors into the backplane connectors.

Place the circuit boards that you previously pulled out of the existing cabinet back into the

correct slots in the existing cabinet.

Mount the power supply(s) for the new cabinet.

Connect the power supply(s) to the cabinet.

Turn the power supply(s) on and verify the presence and polarity of voltage on the terminal

block on the bottom of the cabinet.

If you have not previously tested the cabinet and verified that it powers a board correctly, now is

the time to do it.

Insert a circuit board into the cabinet in any slot. Turn the cabinet power switch on. If

everything is all right, then a green LED at the very top of the circuit board should be lit. Ignore

any other LEDs.

Turn off the cabinet power switch and remove the circuit board.

Place the circuit board(s) for this cabinet in the correct slot(s).

Powering the system back up

Turn the power switch for the new cabinet on.

Turn the power switch for cabinet #1 on.

The system should initialize as it did when it was single cabinet system, but you should see

the lights on the card(s) in the second cabinet turn on and off also.

Connect the maintenance PC to the system and log onto the CSMW.

Verify that the CSMW shows the boards in both cabinets.

Do a system back up. Give it a new name.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

4-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, or BDVNB 101 01/3

Testing and back up

Verify that all existing portables are working.

Verify that all existing base stations are working.

Now is the time to add any connections to LTU/SLU/CLU/DTU boards or to move any boards that

you have decided to move. Which you do first depends on what you are doing and it is up to you

to decide the order of these operations.

Add or move any boards.

Add or move any cables and 66 blocks.

Label or re-label the 66 blocks.

When you are done adding or moving things, DO a system back up. Give it a new name.

Put the card retention bar on the cabinet.

Put the bottom plate back on the cabinet.

Place the front cover on the cabinet and secure it.

4-18

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Central Processing Unit (CPU) – REX-BRD0004 or 2/ROFNB 157 19/2

CHAPTER 5

Central Processing Unit (CPU) – REX-BRD0004 or 2/ROFNB 157 19/2

5.1

General

Maintenance

The CPU contains the following field–exchangeable parts (see Figure 5–4):

CPU Firmware (Mobility) - RYS 105 447

CPU Firmware (Standalone) - RYS 105 657

CPU Firmware, Poll Processor - REX-SW0014 or RYS 105 663

Sync FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) - RYSNB 101 24

Lithium Battery (type DL2032)

The CPU firmware is delivered as a separate item.

The lithium battery is a back-up power supply for the Real Time Clock (RTC) on the CPU board.

The RTC supplies the system date (year, month, day) and time (hours, minutes, seconds). If the

lithium battery dies, the system will require UTAM activation whenever the CPU power is cycled

unless it has been initialized as a non-UTAM system.

5.2

Board Description

Functionality

The CPU board is used in both a Standalone (SA) system and in a Mobility Server (MS) system.

The firmware that is resident on the CPU board determines which type of system the board will

function in.

Firmware RYS 105 657 is for Standalone Systems

Firmware RYS 105 447 is for Mobility Server Systems

Synchronization

If the CPU resides in a system that is part of multiple system configuration, PWT interface and

frame synchronization is required. When the PWT air interface is synchronized, efficient use of

the network capacity and seamless handovers between systems are possible when the coverage

areas overlap. To achieve PWT air interface synchronization in a multiple system configuration,

the respective CPUs (responsible for the frame timing) have to be in sync. CPUs are

synchronized using a master/slave concept, where one master CPU supplies a synchronization

signal to a number of slave CPUs. A slave CPU can act as a master for a further three slave

CPUs, thus creating a multi level star network with a maximum of two levels, see Figure 5-1.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

5-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Central Processing Unit (CPU) – REX-BRD0004 or 2/ROFNB 157 19/2

Slave

Master

Level 1

Slave

Level 2

Fig. 5–1 Synchronization Topology

Strap Settings

As the master CPU determines the timing in the star network, it can either generate the frame

timing on its own or synchronize it to an external source like a 2 Mbit/s link (DLU or DTU).

Synchronizing to a 2 Mbit/s or 1.544Mbit/s link reduces the likelihood of frame slips on the link but

is only allowed when the clock stability is better than 2 ppm. In the Master/Stand Alone mode the

CPU provides the frame timing on its own. As a Slave/Standalone the CPU receives framing sync

from the master RE. In Figure 5–2 an overview of the strap settings is given.

When setting the CPU up as a master or slave, both of the Air Interface master/slave jumpers

must be set the same. Refer to Figure 5.2 for the correct configuration.

When the CPU is strapped as a master, the frame timing strap must be set correctly. Refer to

Figure 5.2 for the correct configuration.

When the CPU is strapped as a slave, the function of the frame timing strap is disabled and the

position of this strap is irrelevant. If the CPU is strapped as a slave then there must be a Sync

cable from the Sync Out on the master RE connected to the Sync In connector on the slave.

Refer to Chapters 17 and 19 in Section 5 of the TPM for information on Sync cable connectivity.

5-2

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Central Processing Unit (CPU) – REX-BRD0004 or 2/ROFNB 157 19/2

Air Interface synchronization

master/slave straps

Frame timing

synchronization source strap

Synchronizes to a 2 Mbit/s(DLU)

link(1.544) (DTU), only allowed

^{when master}(Accepting framing

clock from DTU or DLU source)

Stand alone (default),

mandatory when slave

(Providing framing clock to

DTU or DLU source)

Master (default)

Warning:

Wrong installation will

damage board. Follow

Section 5.3 carefully if

this FPGA chip needs

to be installed.

Slave, frame timing sync. source

strap must be in stand alone

position

Not allowed

Fig. 5–2 Strap Settings

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

5-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Central Processing Unit (CPU) – REX-BRD0004 or 2/ROFNB 157 19/2

Connectors

The CPU has the following front connectors (see Figure 5–4):

Sync in

Sync out (3x)

Printer port

PC port

GA port

The Sync In and Sync Out ports on the CPU are connected via two methods.

Method 1: Refer to Chapter 18, Synchronization Distribution Board and Chapter 20, Modular

Cabinet CPU Cabling. This method is the older method which incorporates an internally mounted,

inside the modular cabinet, Synch Distribution board and cables.

Method 2: Refer to Chapter 20, Modular Cabinet CPU Cabling, a newer method of connecting

sync cables directly between master and slave CPUs without using internally mounted sync board

and cables.

Note: The Sync Distribution Boad (SDB) and cables mentioned in method 1 are no longer

availabe or included in new systems. Method 2 must be used for any new installations or if the

SDB and cables must be replaced on an existing installation.

The SMS/printer, PC and general alarm ports are connected to the MCCB via factory installed

cables.

Interface characteristics of the printer and PC ports are:

asynchronous, 2400-115200 bit/s

8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity

X–on/X–off

LEDs

The following LEDs are located on the front of the CPU board:

LED1 Green

LED2 Red

LED3 Red

: Normally on. Power On LED

: Normally off. Watch–dog LED

: Normally lit very weak. Communication with backplane LED

(not significant)

LED4 Red

LED5 Red

: Normally off. Board Error LED

: Normally off. Info, error or service message received, but not

read yet

LED6 Green

: Test and Maintenance active. On during actual testing, or

during RS232 activity on the PC port.

Reset Button

The CPU is provided with a reset button. If this button is pressed, the CPU and the rest of the RE

are reset and perform a cold start as if the RE was switched off and on again.

Note:

Resetting the CPU may cause the synchronization slave CPUs, connected to this CPU, to lose

their synchronization. Immediate synchronization can be enforced by resetting the slave CPUs

after the synchronization master CPU has been reset. Bear in mind that a synchronization slave

CPU can be a clock provider to other slave CPUs.

5-4

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Central Processing Unit (CPU) – REX-BRD0004 or 2/ROFNB 157 19/2

5.3

Installation

For the installation of the CPU board refer to Figure 5–4 and perform the following steps:

1. Use ESD

precautions.

2. Insert the CPU firmware, RYS 105 447 or RYS 105 657 in the proper socket.

(See Fig. 5-4)

3. Make sure FPGA is installed. Otherwise see FPGA installation (Figure 5-3).

4. Set the straps, shown in Figure 5–2, in the correct position as described in

Paragraph 5.2.

5. Remove the insulation foil between the positive contact of the battery holder and the

lithium battery.

6. Insert the CPU board gently into the card slot in board position 24. The cabinet in

which the CPU board resides automatically becomes cabinet 1.

For FPGA installation use the following steps: Note: FPGA is installed by manufacturer in most

cases.

1. Use ESD

precautions.

2. Be sure the notched corner of the chip is aligned with the blocked corner of the CPU socket.

Note: This notch will not prevent the chip from being inserted incorrectly!

3. Seat with firm but even force until the chip is recessed into the CPU socket.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

5-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Central Processing Unit (CPU) – REX-BRD0004 or 2/ROFNB 157 19/2

Semi-circle

Beveled edge

Notched corner

Arrow

Blocked corner

Socket

Fig. 5-3 FPGA Installation

5-6

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Central Processing Unit (CPU) – REX-BRD0004 or 2/ROFNB 157 19/2

Air Interface synchronization

master/slave straps

Frame timing

synchronization source strap

Sync FPGA

RYSNB 101 24

LED1

LED4

See previous page for

expanded view

Reset button

LED5

LED6

Sync in

Warning:

Incorrect installation will

damage board. Follow

Section 5.3 carefully.

Sync out

Lithium battery

(type DL2032)

Sync out

Printer/SMS

RS232-A

EMPTY

PC port

RS232-B

CPU Firmware

RYS 105 447(Mobility)

RYS 105 657(Standalone)

Not used

General Alarm port

CPU Firmware, Poll Processor

REX-SW0014 or RYS 105 663

Fig. 5-4 CPU-REX-BRD0004 or 2/ROFNB 157 19/2 cont.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

5-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Central Processing Unit (CPU) – REX-BRD0004 or 2/ROFNB 157 19/2

5-8

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, System Boards

CHAPTER 6

System Boards

6.1

Digital Trunk Unit (DTU–E1 CAS, CCS) - REX-BRD0002 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/1

Compliance to Regulations and Standards

The DTU–E1 provides 2 standard CEPT primary rate interfaces and meets the following

requirements:

CE regulation

CE marking

: 91/263/EEC

(this marking is not placed on the DTU–E1 board

because the DCT1900 system is already covered by the CE

marking of the cabinet)

Leased line CTR

G.703

: CTR12

: Electrical characteristics of the 2.048 Mbit/s synchronization

interface

G.704

G.823

G.732

: Synchronization frame structure at 2.048 Mbit/s

: Input jitter requirements

: Characteristics of primary rate PCM multiplex equipment

operating at 2.048 Mbit/s

I.431

: Primary rate layer 1

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Relative humidity

: 32 to 104°F (0 to 70°C)

: -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C)

: 20 to 80%, non condensing

General Specifications

Length x width

13.5" x 7.7" (343 x 195.6mm)

Digital Trunk Specification

Number of primary rate

interfaces per DTU board

Bit rate

: 2

: 2.048 Mbit/s

Signalling

: Common Channel Signalling (CCS), using firmware set

NTM/RYSNB 101 17/3

: Channel Associated Signalling (CAS), using firmware set

RYS 105 664

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

6-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, System Boards

6.2

Digital Trunk Unit, DTU-T1, CAS - REX-BRD0021 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/2

Compliance to Regulations and Standards

The DTU–T1 provides 2 standard T1 interfaces. The DTU–T1 complies with the following EIA/TIA

recommendation:

EIA/TIA 464

: Private Branch Exchange (PBX) Switching Equipment for

Voice–band Applications.

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Relative humidity

: 32 to 104°F (0 to 70°C)

: -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C)

: 20 to 80%, non condensing

General Specifications

Length x width

13.5" x 7.7" (343 x 195.6mm)

Digital Trunk Specification

Number of T1

interfaces per DTU

Bit rate

: 2

: 1.544 Mbit/s

Signalling

: Channel Associated Signalling with bit Robbing (CAS BR)

according to EIA/TIA 464–A FXS DSX–1, using firmware set

RYS 105 660

6.3

Digital Trunk Unit -DTU–T1,CCS - REX-BRD0021 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/3

The DTU–T1 provides 2 standard T1 interfaces. The DTU–T1 complies with the following EIA/TIA

recommendation:

EIA/TIA 464

: Private Branch Exchange (PBX) Switching Equipment for

Voice–band Applications.

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Relative humidity

: 32 to 104°F (0 to 70°C)

: -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C)

: 20 to 80%, non condensing

General Specifications

Length x width

13.5" x 7.7" (343 x 195.6mm)

Digital Trunk Specification

Number of T1

interfaces per DTU

Bit rate

: 2

: 1.544 Mbit/s

Signalling

: Common Channel Signalling with a 64Kbps D channel using

Q.931 protocol with proprietary extensions for mobility

management, using firmware RYS 105 650.

6-2

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, System Boards

6.4

Central Processing Unit (CPU1) - REX-BRD0004 or 2/ROFNB 157 19/2

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Relative humidity

: 32 to 104°F (0 to 70°C)

: -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C)

: 20 to 80%, non condensing

General Specifications

Length x width

RS232 I/O ports

13.5" x 7.7" (343 x 195.6mm)

: 2

Sync

Input ports

Output ports

Lock in time

: 1 via coupler

: 3 via RS422 type drivers

: # 5 minutes after reset and power on

# 5 minutes after a signal interruption # 3 minutes

# 8.8 hours during normal operation

: immediate after interface failure

Loss of sync

6.5

Central Processing Unit (CPU2)-REX-BRD9033, REX-BRD9034

Environment

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Relative humidity

: 32 to 104°F (0 to 70 °C)

: -40 to 158°F (−40 to 70 °C)

: 20 to 80%, non condensing

General Specifications

Length x width

RS232 I/O ports

: 344 x 195 mm

: 2

Sync

Input ports

Output ports

Lock in time

: 1 via RJ45

: 3 via RJ45

: # 5 minutes after reset and power on

# 5 minutes after a signal interruption # 3 minutes

# 8.8 hours during normal operation

: immediate after interface failure

Loss of sync

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

6-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, System Boards

6.6

Speech Link Unit, SLU - REX-BRD0015 or ROFNB 157 16/1

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Relative humidity

: 32 to 104°F (0 to 70°C)

: -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C)

: 20 to 80%, non condensing

General Specifications

Length x width

13.5" x 7.7" (343 x 195.6mm)

Current Limitation

Current limitation of the Base

Stations power

: 1.3 A (T = 25 °C)

0.75 A (T = 70 °C)

Transport Data Rate

Data rate between SLU and

Base Station

: 384 kbit/s

Speech Coding

Telephone exchange side

: 64 kbit/s PCM (A–law or μ–law, country dependent,

downloaded from CPU)

Base Stations side

: 32 kbit/s ADPCM

DTMF Levels

Country dependent (downloaded from CPU)

Artificial Leakage

Only if a DTU is used

: -24 dB

Dial Tone Detection

Sensitivity level

Detection time

Frequencies

: -29 dBm

: 800 ms

: 350/440 Hz

6-4

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, System Boards

6.7

Speech Processing Unit, SPU-S - REX-BRD0017 or ROFNB 157 16/3

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Relative humidity

: 32 to 104°F (0 to 70°C)

: -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C)

: 20 to 80%, non condensing

General Specifications

Length x width

13.5" x 7.7" (343 x 195.6mm)

Speech Coding

Telephone exchange side

: 64 kbit/s PCM (A–law or μ–law, country dependent,

downloaded from CPU)

Base Stations side

: 32 kbit/s ADPCM

DTMF Levels

Country dependent (downloaded from CPU)

Artificial Leakage

Only if a DTU is used

: -24 dB

Dial Tone Detection

Sensitivity level

Detection time

Frequencies

: -29 dBm

: 800 ms

: 350/440 Hz

6.8

Cell Link Unit, CLU - REX-BRD0014 or ROFNB 157 11/2

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Relative humidity

: 32 to 104°F (0 to 70°C)

: -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C)

: 20 to 80%, non-condensing

Fusing

Power to the Base Stations is fused by two replaceable 1.0 AT fuses per Base Station.

Transport Data Rate

384 kbit/s

General Specifications

Length x width

13.5" x 7.7" (343 x 195.6mm)

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

6-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, System Boards

6.9

Cell Link Unit, CLU-S - REX-BRD0016 or ROFNB 157 16/2

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Relative humidity

: 32 to 104°F (0 to 70°C)

: -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C)

: 20 to 80%, non condensing

General Specifications

Length x width

13.5" x 7.7" (343 x 195.6mm)

Current Limitation

Current limitation of the Base

Stations power

: 1.3 A (T = 25 °C)

0.75 A (T = 70 °C)

Transport Data Rate

Data rate between SLU and

Base Station

: 384 kbit/s

Speech Coding

Base Stations side

: 32 kbit/s ADPCM

6-6

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, System Boards

6.10 Line Termination Unit, LTU - REX-BRD0007 or ROFNB 157 02/06

Compliance to Regulations and Standards

EIA-470

: USA

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Relative humidity

: 32 to 158°F (0 to 70°C)

: -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C)

: 20 to 80%, non condensing

General Specifications

Length x width

13.5" x 7.7" (343 x 195.6mm)

Telephone Line Interface Specifications

Insulation

: 1.5 kVac between line and secondary circuitry

: 1 kVac between line and cabinet

DC Characteristics

Range of line current

: 10-100mA

On–hook equivalent resistance : > 1M between wires a and b for 50 - 250 V

AC Characteristics

On–hook impedance

: > 100 k for voice signals

> 15 k for ringing signal

Off–hook impedance

: return loss optimized against 210 + (880 // 150 nF)

Ringing Detection

Ringing voltages

Frequency range

: 10 - 90 Vrms

: > 20 Hz

Pulse Dialing

Waveform

Selected digit N generates

: 60ms pulse, 40ms pulse-USA, Sweden

: N + 1 pulse or

N pulses and digit 0 generates 10 pulses

Resistance during pulsing

Line voltage

: > 5 M and < 560

: limited to 100 - 14Vdc

DTMF Dialling

The DTMF signals are determined by the combination of the SPU and the SICOFI parameters.

Speech Coding

Method

: software selectable

AD Gain

DA Gain

Hybrid balance impedance

: determined by SICOFI parameters

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

6-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, System Boards

6.11 Line Termination Unit , LTU2 - REX-BRD0019A

Compliance to Regulations and Standards

EIA-470

: USA

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

Storage

Relative humidity

: 32 to 158°F (0 to 70°C)

: -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C)

: 20 to 80%, non condensing

General Specifications

Length x width

Weight

13.5" x 7.6" x .8" (344 x 192 x 20 mm)

.95 lb (430 grams) (excluding packaging)

Telephone Line Interface Specifications

Insulation

: 1.5 kVac between line and secondary circuitry

: 1 kVac between line and cabinet

DC Characteristics

Range of line current

: 60 mA max.

On–hook equivalent resistance : > 9 M between wires a and b for 200 Vdc

Resistance to earth (in quiescent

and loop state)

: 1 G between wires a/b and E-wire for up to 250 Vdc

AC Characteristics

On–hook impedance

Off–hook impedance

Return Loss

: Software programmable 600 or complex

: See ’Ringing Detection’

: 15 dB min.

Relative levels

: Software programmable

Input (AD loss) range

Output (DA loss) range

Balancing impedance

Longitudinal conversion loss

: 6 to -11dBr against 270 + (750 // 150 nF)

: 12 to -4.5 dBr against 270 + (750 // 150 nF)

: Software programmable; 600 , 900 or complex

: 60 dB min. between 50 Hz and 4 KHz

Ringing Detection

Ringing voltages

Impedance for voice signals

Capacity

: 10 k min. between 24 to 90 Vrms, 25 to 50 Hz

: 100 k min. at AC voltages up to 2 V (peak),300 Hz to 3400 Hz

: 1 μF +/- 5%

Ringing voltages

Insensitive to signals

Frequency range

: 24 to 120 Vrms

: 17 Vrms max.

: Software programmable between 16 and 64 Hz

Pulse Dialing

Make/break period

Selected digit N generates

Line Voltage during pulsing

: Software programmable between 0 to 255 ms

: N pulses and digit 0 generates either 10 pulses (default)

: Limited to 240 Vdc

6-8

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, System Boards

DTMF Dialling

The DTMF signals are determined by the combination of the output level of LTU and SPU

parameters.

Speech Coding

Standard

: G.712

Method

: 64 kbit/s A-law or μ−law PCM‘

Speech Coding

Method

: software selectable

AD Gain

DA Gain

Hybrid balance impedance

: determined by SICOFI parameters

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

6-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Product Specifications, System Boards

6.12 Digital Line Unit, DLU - REX-BRD0023

AWS1024 Meridian, AWS1025 Norstar, AWS1026 Lucent

The DLU has 12 analog front ends (ports) that provide 12 digital line interfaces to the PBX.

Compliance to Regulations and Standards

Safety

: ANSI/UL 60950

: CSA 22.2-950 3rd edition

: EN 61000-4-2

Electrostatic discharge

Radiated susceptibility

Electrically Fast

: EN 61-4-3

Transients (burst)

Conducted disturbances

Radiated and

: EN 61000-4-4

: EN 61000-4-6

Conducted Emissions

: EN 55022, procedure CISPR 22 and CISPR 16 Class A

Environmental

Temperature

Operating

: 32 to 158°F (0 to 70°C)

Storage

: -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C)

Relative humidity

: 95% max, non condensing at 77 to 158°F (25 - 70°C)

General Specifications

Length x width

: 13.0" x 7.0 x 0.79" (340 x 178 mm)

Maximum Power Consumption : 3.0 W at 5V

1.2 W at -12V

RS232 serial port

: 1 via a DB9 female connector

Digital Line Specification

Number of digital

interfaces per DLU

Bit rate

: 12

: Automatically adjusted for the PBX type it is configured for.

: Proprietary digital signal encoding.

Signalling

6-10

Specs-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Cell Link Unit (CLU) – REX-BRD0014 or ROFNB 157 11/2

CHAPTER 7

Cell Link Unit (CLU) – REX-BRD0014 or ROFNB 157 11/2

7.1

General

The CLU is used to control up to 8 Base Stations via twisted pair cables with a maximum length of

2.2 miles.

Maintenance

The CLU contains the following field–exchangeable parts (see Figure 7–1):

CLU Firmware, Board Controller - RYT/ROFNB 157 11/2

Two 1 AT fuses for each Base Station circuit (see Figure 7–1)

7.2

Board Description

Straps

Not applicable.

Connectors

The CLU has 4 connectors at the front by which the CLCs are connected to the Base Stations and

1 connector for input of the Base Station power:

CLC 1–8

Base Station Power

: To connect Base Station 1 to 8.

: To connect -48 Volts from the MCCB for powering the Base

Stations.

The power connector does not have a polarity. It makes no difference which pin becomes plus or

minus.

LEDs

LED1 Green

LED2 Red

LED3 Red

LED4 Red

: Normally on. Power On LED

: Normally off. Watch–dog LED

: Normally off. Board not polled LED

: Normally off. Base Station in NEW state or board error

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

7-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Cell Link Unit (CLU) – REX-BRD0014 or ROFNB 157 11/2

CLU Firmware, Board Controller

RYSNB 101 19

LED1

LED4

Base

Station

Power

CLC8

Base 8

Base 7

Base 6

Base 5

Base 4

Base 3

Base 2

Base 1

CLC7

CLC6

CLC5

6,7: SC0

2,3: SC1

5,8: EPP0

1,4: EPP1

CLC4

CLC3

CLC2

CLC1

Fuses

Fig. 7–1 CLU - REX-BRD0014 or ROFNB 157 11/2

7-2

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Cell Link Unit (CLU) – REX-BRD0014 or ROFNB 157 11/2

CLU

Power from

MCCB

Fuse

SC0

SC1

CLC 8

Base Station 8

EPP0, 1

SC0

SC1

CLC 1

Base Station 1

EPP0, 1

Fig. 7–2 Power Distribution on the CLU

7.3

Installation

1. Insert the CLU into the card guides in the specified slot position.

2. Gently push the board into the back connector until it locks. Don’t use any force.

3. Connect the CLU power cable, TSRNB 101 33.

4. Connect the CLU signal cable, NTM/TSRNB 101 29.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

7-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Cell Link Unit (CLU) – REX-BRD0014 or ROFNB 157 11/2

7-4

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Cell Link Unit (CLU-S) –REX-BRD0016 or ROFNB 157 16/2

CHAPTER 8

Cell Link Unit (CLU-S) –REX-BRD0016 or ROFNB 157 16/2

8.1

General

The CLU-S is used to control up to 8 Base Stations via twisted pair cables with a maximum length

of 1.3 miles.

Maintenance

The CLU-S contains the following field–exchangeable part (see Figure 8–1):

CLU Firmware, Board Controller - RYSNB 101 19

8.2

Board Description

Straps

Not applicable.

Connectors

The CLU has 4 connectors at the front by which the CLCs are connected to the Base Stations and

1 connector for input of the Base Station power:

CLC 1–8

Base Station Power

: To connect Base Station 1 to 8.

: To connect -48 Volts from the MCCB for powering the Base

Stations.

The power connector does not have a polarity. It makes no difference which pin becomes plus or

minus.

LEDs

LED1 Green

LED2 Red

LED3 Red

LED4 Red

: Normally on. Power On LED

: Normally off. Watch–dog LED

: Normally off. Board not polled LED

: Normally off. Base Station in NEW state or board error

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

8-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Cell Link Unit (CLU-S) –REX-BRD0016 or ROFNB 157 16/2

LED1

LED4

Base

Station

Power

CLC8

Base 8

Base 7

Base 6

Base 5

Base 4

Base 3

CLC7

CLC6

CLC5

6,7: SC0

2,3: SC1

5,8: EPP0

1,4: EPP1

CLC4

CLC3

CLC2

Base 2

Base 1

CLC1

CLU Firmware, Board Controller

RYSNB 101 19

Thermistor

Fig. 8–1 CLU-S - REX-BRD0016 or ROFNB 157 16/2

8-2

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Cell Link Unit (CLU-S) –REX-BRD0016 or ROFNB 157 16/2

Thermistor

Power from

MCCB

CLU-S

SC0

CLC 8

SC1

Base Station 8

EPP0, 1

SC0

SC1

CLC 1

Base Station 1

EPP0, 1

Fig. 8–2 Power Distribution on the CLU-S

8.3

Installation

1. Insert the CLU-S into the card guides in the specified board position.

2. Gently push the board into the back connector until it locks. Don’t use any force.

3. Connect the CLU power cable, TSRNB 101 33.

4. Connect the CLU signal cable, NTM/TSRNB 101 29.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

8-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Cell Link Unit (CLU-S) –REX-BRD0016 or ROFNB 157 16/2

8-4

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Speech Link Unit (SLU) – REX-BRD0015 or ROFNB 157 16/1

CHAPTER 9

Speech Link Unit (SLU) – REX-BRD0015 or ROFNB 157 16/1

9.1

General

The SLU is a combination of an SPU and a CLU on one board. The CLU part is used to control up

to 8 Base Stations via twisted pair cables with a maximum length of 1.3 miles. The SPU section

has 8 speed circuits.

Maintenance

The SLU contains the following field–exchangeable parts (see Figure 9–1):

SPU Firmware, Board Controller - RYSNB 101 20

CLU Firmware, Board Controller - RYSNB 101 19

SPU-S DSP Firmware, Board Controller - REX-SW0013 or RYS 105 446

9.2

Board Description

Straps

Not applicable.

Connectors

The CLU part has 8 connectors at the front by which the CLCs are connected to the Base Stations

and 1 connector for input of the Base Station power:

CLC 1–8

Base Station Power

: To connect Base Station 1 to 8.

: To connect -48 volts from the MCCB for powering the Base

Stations.

The power connector does not have a polarity. It makes no difference which pin becomes plus or

minus.

LEDs

SPU part:

LED1 Green

LED2 Red

LED3 Red

LED4 Red

: Normally on. Power On LED SPU

: Normally off. Watch–dog LED SPU

: Normally off. Board not polled LED SPU

: Normally off. Board Error LED SPU

CLU part:

LED1 Green

LED2 Red

LED3 Red

LED4 Red

: Normally on. Power On LED CLU

: Normally off. Watch–dog LED CLU

: Normally off. Board not polled LED CLU

: Normally off. Base Station in NEW state or board error CLU

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

9-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Speech Link Unit (SLU) – REX-BRD0015 or ROFNB 157 16/1

SPU-DSP Firmware, Board Controller

REX-SW0013 or RYS 105 446

SPU Firmware, Board Controller

RYSNB 101 20

LED1

SPU

part

LED4

LED1

CLU

part

LED4

Base

Station

Power

CLC8

Base 8

Base 7

Base 6

Base 5

Base 4

Base 3

CLC7

CLC6

CLC5

6,7: SC0

2,3: SC1

5,8: EPP0

1,4: EPP1

CLC4

CLC3

CLC2

Base 2

Base 1

CLC1

CLU Firmware, Board Controller

RYSNB 101 19

Thermistor

Fig. 9–1 SLU - REX-BRD0015 or ROFNB 157 16/1

9-2

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Speech Link Unit (SLU) – REX-BRD0015 or ROFNB 157 16/1

Thermistor

SLU

Power from

MCCB

SC0

CLC 8

SC1

Base Station 8

EPP0, 1

SC0

SC1

CLC 1

Base Station 1

EPP0, 1

Fig. 9–2 Base Station Power Distribution on the SLU

9.3

Installation

1. Insert the SLU into the card guide in the specified board position.

2. Gently push the board into the back connector until it locks. Don’t use any force.

3. Connect the CLU power cable, TSRNB 101 33.

4. Connect the CLU signal cable, NTM/TSRNB 101 29.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

9-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Speech Link Unit (SLU) – REX-BRD0015 or ROFNB 157 16/1

9-4

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Speech Processing Unit (SPU–S) – REX-BRD0017 or ROFNB 157 16/3

CHAPTER 10

Speech Processing Unit (SPU–S) – REX-BRD0017 or ROFNB 157 16/3

10.1 General

Maintenance

The SPU–S contains the following field–exchangeable parts (see Figure 10–1):

SPU Firmware, Board Controller, RYSNB 101 20

SPU-S DSP Firmware, Board Controller, REX-SW0013 or RYS 105 446

10.2 Board Description

Straps and Connectors

Not applicable.

LEDs

LED1 Green

LED2 Red

LED3 Red

LED4 Red

: Normally on. Power On LED

: Normally off. Watch–dog LED

: Normally off. Board not polled LED

: Normally off. Board Error LED

10.3 Installation

1. Insert the SPU–S gently into the card guide in its specified board position

2. Gently push the board into the back connector until it locks. Don’t use any force.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

10-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Speech Processing Unit (SPU–S) – REX-BRD0017 or ROFNB 157 16/3

SPU-DSP Firmware, Board Controller

REX-SW0013 or RYS 105 446

SPU-S Firmware, Board Controller

RYSNB 101 20

LED1

LED4

Fig. 10–1 SPU–S - REX-BRD0017 or ROFNB 157 16/3

10-2

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Digital Trunk Unit (DTU–E1) – REX-BRD0002 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/1

CHAPTER 11

Digital Trunk Unit (DTU–E1) – REX-BRD0002 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/1

11.1 General

The DTU–E1 provides 60 communication channels via two 2 Mbit/s links.

Maintenance

The DTU–E1 has the following field–exchangeable parts (see Figure 11–2 for placement &

orientation):

DTU–E1 CCS Firmware Set NTM/RYSNB 101 17/3

DTU–E1 CAS Firmware Set RYS 105 664

The DTU–E1 Firmware Set is delivered as a separate item

11.2 Board Description

The DTU–E1 Board contains two identical DTCs (DTC1 and DTC2), each with their own identical

connectors and LEDs.

Straps

By means of straps, the type of cable to be used can be selected: coaxial pairs or 120 ohm twisted

pairs (symmetrical). In Figure 11–1 an overview of the strap settings is given, for the location refer

to Figure 11–2.

Note:

The straps should be placed in the twisted pair position (120 Ω).

Coax (connection closed)

Twisted pair (connection open)

Not allowed

Coax/twisted pair straps

DTC1 and DTC 2

Not allowed

Fig. 11–1 Strap Settings DTC1/DTC2

Connectors

The DTU–E1 board has 4 connectors at the front, two for each DTC. One is for coax cable and the

other one is for twisted pair cable connection. See Figure 11-2.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

11-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Digital Trunk Unit (DTU–E1) – REX-BRD0002 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/1

LEDs

Each DTC has its own LEDs:

LED1 Green

LED2 Red

LED3 Red

LED4 Red

: Normally on. Power On LED

: Normally off. Watch–dog LED

: Normally off. Board not polled LED

: Normally off. Board Error LED

11.3 Installation

1. Place the DTU–E1 Firmware Set PROMs into the IC sockets as indicated and check the strap

settings (see Figure 11–1).

2. Insert the DTU–E1 into the card guides in the specified board position.

3. Gently push the board into the backplane connector until it locks. Don’t use any force.

4. Connect the twisted pair cables for cable set AWS1033 to the front of the board.

11-2

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Digital Trunk Unit (DTU–E1) – REX-BRD0002 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/1

LED1

LED2

LED3

LED4

DTU-E1 Firmware

RYSNB 101 17/3(CCS)

DTU-E1 Firmware

RYSNB 101 17/1(CAS)

Coax/twisted

pair straps

Coax

DTC2

Twisted

pair

LED1

LED2

LED3

LED4

DTC1

DTU-E1 Firmware

RYSNB 101 17/3(CCS)

DTU-E1 Firmware

RYSNB 101 17/1(CAS)

Coax/twisted

pair straps

Coax

Twisted

pair

Fig. 10–2 DTU–E1 – REX-BRD0002 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/1

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

11-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Digital Trunk Unit (DTU–E1) – REX-BRD0002 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/1

11-4

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Digital Trunk Unit (DTU-T1, CAS) - REX-BRD0021 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/2

CHAPTER 12

Digital Trunk Unit (DTU-T1, CAS) - REX-BRD0021 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/2

12.1 General

The DTU–T1 provides 48 communication channels with the PBX via two 1.544Mbit/s links.

Maintenance

The DTU–T1 has the following field–exchangeable parts (see Figure 12-1 for placement &

orientation):

DTU–T1 CAS Firmware RYS 105 660 (Factory Installed)

12.2 Board Description

The DTU–T1 Board contains two identical Digital Trunk Circuits (DTC1 and DTC2), each with their

own identical connectors and LEDs.

Jumpers

The line length selection can be adjusted with the three jumpers, 1, 2, and 3 (see Table 13-1).

Cables

The DTU-T1 interfaces via 100 ohm twisted pair cable only (AWS1034)

Connectors

The DTU–T1 board has two connectors on the front, one for each DTC. The connectors are for

twisted pair connections to the PBX.

LEDs

Each DTC has its own LEDs:

LED1 Green

LED2 Red

LED3 Red

LED4 Red

: Normally on. Power On LED

: Normally off. Watch–dog LED

: Normally off. Board not polled LED

: Normally off. Board Error LED

12.3 Installation

1. Place the DTU–T1 Firmware PROMs and set the jumpers (see Figure 12-1 and Table 12-1).

2. Insert the DTU–T1 on to the card guide in the specified board position.

3. Gently push the board into the backplane connector until it locks. Don’t use any force.

4. Connect the cable, AWS1034, to the front of the board.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

12-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Digital Trunk Unit (DTU-T1, CAS) - REX-BRD0021 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/2

Cable length (Ft.)

Jumper placed

0 – 164

66 – 262

197 – 426

361 – 656

459 – 754

689 – 951

886 – 1050

Table 12–1 Setting of the Jumpers

12-2

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Digital Trunk Unit (DTU-T1, CAS) - REX-BRD0021 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/2

LED1

LED2

LED3

LED4

DTU-T1 Firmware

RYS 105 660

See Table 12-1 for

jumper setting

1 2 3

DTC2

LED1

LED2

LED3

LED4

DTC1

DTU-T1 Firmware

RYS 105 660

See Table 12-1 for

jumper setting

1 2 3

Fig. 12–1 DTU–T1 – REX-BRD0021 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/2

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

12-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Digital Trunk Unit (DTU-T1, CAS) - REX-BRD0021 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/2

12-4

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Digital Trunk Unit (DTU-T1, CCS) - REX-BRD0025 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/3

CHAPTER 13

Digital Trunk Unit (DTU-T1, CCS) - REX-BRD0025 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/3

13.1 General

The DTU–T1 provides 46 (23B+D) communication channels via two 1.544Mbit/s links (primary

rate interfaces).

Maintenance

The DTU–T1 has the following field–exchangeable parts (see Figure 13-1 for placement &

orientation):

DTU–T1 CCS Firmware RYS 105 650

The DTU–T1 CCS Firmware is pre-installed on the board.

13.2 Board Description

The DTU–T1 Board contains two identical Digital Trunk Circuits (DTC1 and DTC2), each with their

own identical connectors and LEDs.

Cables

The DTU-T1 interfaces via 100 ohm twisted pair cable only (AWS1034).

Jumpers

The line length selection can be adjusted with the three jumpers 1, 2 and 3 (see Table 13-1).

Note:

The jumper settings should be 3 O, 2 O and 1 C if the DTC is externally looped back via the

twisted pair connector.

Connectors

The DTU–T1 board has 4 connectors at the front, two for each DTC. Only the twisted pair

connector is used. See Figure 13-1.

LEDs

Each DTC has its own LEDs:

LED1 Green

LED2 Red

LED3 Red

LED4 Red

: Normally on. Power On LED

: Normally off. Watch–dog LED (not significant)

: Normally off. Board not polled LED

: Normally off. Board Error LED

13.3 Installation

1. Place the DTU–T1 Firmware PROMs and check the strap setting (see Figure 13-1).

2. Insert the DTU–T1 into the card guide in the specified board position.

3. Gently push the board into the backplane connector until it locks. Don’t use any force.

4. Connect the cable, AWS1034 to the front of the board.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

13-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Digital Trunk Unit (DTU-T1, CCS) - REX-BRD0025 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/3

Cable length (Ft.)

Jumper placed

0 – 164

66 – 262

197 – 426

361 – 656

459 – 754

689 – 951

886 – 1050

Table 13–1 Setting of the Jumpers

13-2

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Digital Trunk Unit (DTU-T1, CCS) - REX-BRD0025 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/3

LED1

LED2

LED3

LED4

DTU-T1 Firmware

RYS 105 650

See Table 13-1

for jumper setting

1 2 3

Coax

DTC2

Twisted

pair

LED1

LED2

LED3

LED4

DTC1

DTU-T1 Firmware

RYS 105 650

See Table 13-1

for jumper setting

1 2 3

Coax

Twisted

pair

Fig. 13–1 DTU–T1– REX-BRD0021 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/3

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

13-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Digital Trunk Unit (DTU-T1, CCS) - REX-BRD0025 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/3

13-4

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Line Termination Unit (LTU) – REX-BRD0007 or ROFNB 157 02/6 and LTU2 - REX-BRD0019A or ROFNB

CHAPTER 14

Line Termination Unit (LTU) – REX-BRD0007 or ROFNB 157 02/6 and

LTU2 - REX-BRD0019A or ROFNB 157 25/2

14.1 General

The LTU supports 8 two wire analog connections to a PBX.

Maintenance

The LTU contains the following field–exchangeable part (see Figure 14-1):

LTU Firmware - REX-SW0012 or RYS 105 661

LTU2 Firmware - REX-LTU2FW 01/1H

Note: LTU2 can only be used with CPU2 board.

14.2 Board Description

Jumpers

Not applicable.

Connectors

The LTU has 4 connectors at the front by which Line Termination Circuits (LTCs) are connected to

the PBX/Centrex.

1. LTC1 – LTC4: connection of PBX line 1 to 4

2. LTU Ground: connection of signalling earth (ELR)

3. LTC5 – LTC8: connection of PBX line 5 to 8

4. Pin a is tip, pin b is ring. Pins a’ and b’ are not used.

LEDs

LED1

LED2

LED3

LED4

: Normally on. Power On

: Normally off. Watch–dog

: Normally off. Board not polled

: Normally off. Board Error

14.3 Installation

1. Insert the LTU gently into the card guide in its specified board position (See Figure 14-1).

2. Gently push the board into the back connector until it locks. Do not use any force.

3. Connect the connectors from cable set NTM/TSRNB 101 31 to the front of the board.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

14-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Line Termination Unit (LTU) – REX-BRD0007 or ROFNB 157 02/6 and LTU2 - REX-BRD0019A or ROFNB

LED1

LED2

LED3

LED4

LTC8

LTC7

LTC6

LTC5

LTU Ground

LTC4

LTC3

LTC2

LTC1

LTU Firmware REX-SW0012 OR RYS 105 661

LTU2 Firmware REX-LTU2FW01/1H

Fig. 14–1 LTU - REX-BRD0007 or ROFNB 157 02/6 and

LTU2 - REX-BRD0019A or ROFNB 157 25/2

14-2

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Digital Line Unit (DLU) - REX-BRD0023

CHAPTER 15

Digital Line Unit (DLU) - REX-BRD0023

AWS1024 Meridian, AWS1025 Norstar, AWS1026 Lucent

15.1 General

There are 12 transformer-isolated digital front ends (ports) on the board that provide 12 individual

digital lines. These digital lines can support up to 12 Portable Telephones.

Maintenance

Upgrades and re-programming of the DLU board’s flash memory are done via the RS232 serial

cable and the serial port on the face of the DLU board (COM 1). The board does not need to be

removed from the system during reprogramming but all twelve ports will be out of service during

this process. The RJ-45 connectors should be disconnected from the DLU board before

downloading software.

The boards may be inserted into or removed from a live system. Other boards already in the

system however, may reset during live insertion.

The DLU will come pre-programed with software specific to each PBX. The DLU board will have a

specific part number for each PBX it is to integrate with.

The DLU is programable to accommodate the need for software enhancements and fixes.

Note:

Boards should be inserted /removed one at a time. All connections to the RJ45 connectors and the

DB9 connector should be removed prior to live insertion or removal.

15.2 Board Description

Jumpers

Not applicable

Cables

The DLU interfaces via cable set AWS1019. Each cable serves 2 boards.

Connectors

COM 1

: The RS232 serial port is for field service.

JP6 (ports 1 - 6)

: The RJ45 connectors on the front end are for twisted pair

connections to the PBX. There are 12 connectors, one for each

DLC. (The Tip/Ring connections appear on pair 1 (pins 4 and 5)

of the RJ45 connector).

JP7 (ports 7 - 12)

JP5

: Backplane connector, female DIN96 R type.

LEDs

LED1 Green

LED2 Red

LED3 Red

LED4 Red

: Normally on. Power On LED

: Normally off. Watch–dog LED

: Normally off. Board not polled LED

: Normally off. Board Error LED.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

15-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, AWS1024 Meridian, AWS1025 Norstar, AWS1026 Lucent

15.3 Installation

1. Insert the DLU on to the card guide in the selected board position.

2. Gently push the board into the backplane connector until it locks. Don’t use too much force.

3. Connect the connectors from cable set AWS1019 to the front of the board according to the

numbered positions.

15.4 Programming

CPU Settings

The information below is for a Stand Alone Radio Exchange strapped as a Master.

The CPUs frame timing sychronization source strap must be strapped to sync externally. If the

Radio Exchange has a DTU, it will synchronize from this link first. If no DTU is present, it will use

the DLU link for synchronization. See Figure 5-1, Chapter 5, Section 5 and Figure 6-2, Chapter 6,

Section 5 for further strap guidance for CPU1 and CPU2.

Set-Up

The following must be connected and set-up before you can update the DLU.

Make sure the Radio Exchange is powered on the CPU1 is at least release R5C or higher, and

the CPU2 is at least R2A or higher.

DLU must be inserted into the Radio Exchange.

DLU interface cable must be connected from an available COM port on the PC to the front

COM port of the DLU being updated.

<Application>.hex Version Download Procedure

Before continuing, make sure all requirements listed above are met. The following steps will

explain how to donwload the newest application software for the DLU.

1. At the DLU> prompt, press da and return. Terminal should display “Erasing the download

area......” and “Begin transmission now, CTRL-C to abort” and “DLU>”

2. Press File:Send File in the Tera Term application; select the <application>.hex file you want to

download and press Open. A pop up window should display the filename you are sending

and the bytes being transferred. When the file is completely transferred (~2 min.), the window

will disappear and the board should reset. On the display you should see “>>>Boot DLU [PBX

type] Ver: Application version.....” and “DLU>”

15-2

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, AWS1024 Meridian, AWS1025 Norstar, AWS1026 Lucent

<FPGA>.mcs Version Download Procedure

1. At the DLU> prompt in the terminal window, press df and return. Should see

“Erasing download area, blocks 3,4,5 and “Transmit <fpga>.mcs file now, CTRL-C to abort”

and “DLU”.

2. Press File:Send File in the Tera Term application; select the <FPGA>.mcs file you want to

download and press open. A pop up window should display the filename you are sending and

the bytes being transferred. When the file is completely transferred (~4 min.), the window will

disapper and the board should reset. On the display you should see “>>>Boot DLU[PBX type]

Ver: Application version H/W:FPGA version.......” and “DLU”.

At this point, if both of these procedures have completed without error, you have successfully

upgraded the DLU board.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

15-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, AWS1024 Meridian, AWS1025 Norstar, AWS1026 Lucent

ascom

LED1

LED2

LED3

LED4

RS232

Serial Port

COM 1

port 12

JP7

P11

P10

RJ45

Connectors

port 7

port 6

JP5

JP6

port 1

DLU

Fig. 15–1 DLU - REX-BRD0023

15-4

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Base Station – KRC 101 1371

CHAPTER 16

Base Station – KRC 101 1371

**To order a complete Base Station, use Part Number: DB600-001**

16.1 General

The Base Station is connected to the RE by means of minimum CAT3, unshielded twisted pair

cables via a RJ45 connector.

Contents of the Box

The box in which the Base Station is packed contains:

A Base Station

Mounting Bracket

Power Distribution

Base Stations can be powered by:

The RE via the data pairs

The RE via the data pairs and the EPP pair(s) - for extended distances

A local AC/-48V DC Adaptor

An external -48V supply

Note:

For more information about power distribution, refer to Section 4, Chapter 4 "Base Station

Powering".

Firmware

If necessary, the firmware in the Base Station can be updated by downloading the firmware into

the Base Station. Downloading can be performed without disconnecting the Base Stations. The

new firmware is stored in flash memory. How to download the firmware is described in CSMW

Help files.

Connectors

X838

X839

X840

: 8–pin RJ45 modular jack

: 6–pin RJ11 modular jack - for engineering use only

The two RJ45 connectors are interconnected on the board, but only one is connected at a time.

Cabling must be terminated on a modular jack(RJ45).

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

16-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Base Station – KRC 101 1371

LEDs (Fig. 16-1)

LED1

LED2

Power LED

Status LED

Green

Green/Red/Orange

Base Station powered

Base Station Status

LED 1

LED 2

OFF

Meaning

OFF

Base Station is not operational. There is no power.

GREEN

OFF

Base Station is operational. There are no active connections.

Connection(s) is(are) made with the base station.

GREEN

RED

Base Station is unlocked. Base Station is not synchronized to RE.

FLASHING

Base Station is operational but not available (self test, not

RED/GREEN initialized, no communication with CCFP, no UTAM approval)

GREEN

ORANGE Base Station is downloading.

Table 16-1 Meaning of LED1 and LED2

16-2

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Base Station – KRC 101 1371

6 5/16"

LED1

LED2

7 3/16"

label

}

RJ45

RJ11

Front

Back

Front

Fig. 16-1 Base Station Cover and Back

16.2 Base Station Cabling

Each Base Station requires a minimum of 2 pairs of CAT3 unshielded twisted pair cable. These

two pair will be SC0 (signalling channel 0) and SC1 (signalling channel 1). Besides being used for

signalling there is also 48 volts provided between the two pair to power the Base Station. One pair

is at a -48V potential with respect to the other pair.

How far a Base Station may be powered on the two pair is shown in a chart in Section 4, Chapter

4, Table 4-3. If the cable distance to the Base Station exceeds the value in the chart for 2 pair,

then the EPP (Express Power Pair) may be used. The EPP is a third pair of wires brought out of

the Radio Exchange that supplies -48V. The EPP contains two wires, EPP0 and EPP1, where

EPP1 is positive with respect to EPP0.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

16-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Base Station – KRC 101 1371

The cable set, NTM/TSRNB 101 29, that connects the CLU/SLU to the MDF brings out the three

pairs mentioned above: SC0, SC1, and EPP. Refer to Fig. 21-3, 66 Block Diagram in Chapter 21

for the pin out of the 66 Block where this cable terminates.

A minimum of -21V DC is required at the Base Station for it to operate. When a Base Station is

located too far away from the Radio Exchange to be powered by the Radio Exchange, then power

can be provided by a local -48V power supply or an AC to 48V DC adaptor. The power supply or

adapter should be placed in the last Intermediate Distribution Frame before the Base Station.

Hook the output of the power supply/adapter to the EPP wires going to the Base Station; DO NOT

connect the EPP wires at the Radio Exchange. Only the two data pairs should go from the Radio

Exchange to the Base Station in this situation. The EPP wires are picked up in the last

Intermediate Distribution Frame where the Base Station’s power source is located.

16.3 Base Station Cable Delay Measurement

The cable delay in each of the cable pairs going to every Base Station must be measured in order

to program the Base Station delays into the system at initialization time. This is necessary in order

to synchronize all Base Stations in the system.

Base Station cable delay may be measured by two methods, ADM or measurement with a TDR

(Time Domain Reflectometer).

ADM, or Automatic cable Delay Measurement, is a feature where the CPU automatically

measures the delay in the cable hooked up to a Base Station. Beginning with the hardware and

software releases listed below, the DCT1900 system can automatically determine the correct Base

Station cable delay. This means that it is no longer mandatory to have a TDR (Time Domain

Reflectometer) on each and every job site to measure the cable delays.

Item

CPU1

Hardware PN

REX-BRD0004

Rev

R1A

Firmware/Software

DCT1900 Firmware

CLU-S Board Controller

Unlicensed

Application

Mobility

Standalone

Mobility

MOB & SA

Standalone

Mobility

MOB & SA

Firmware PN

RYS 105 447

RYS 105 657

Rev

R2A

CPU2

SLU

CLU-S

CSM

CSMW

REX-BRD9033

REX-BRD9034

REX-BRD0015

REX-BRD0016

NTM 201 2087

NTM 201 1813

REX-MCT9023

REX-MCT9022

R1A

R3B

R3A

R2B

R3C

RYSNB 101 19

LZY 213 1031

LZY 213 903

R2A

R2B

R2A

Unlicensed

UTAM

International

Table 16-2 Minimum Release Requirements to Support ADM

Note:

ADM will not be supported if the system is not comprized of the listed minimum release levels. The

Automatic delay measurement does not work with the CLU boards (REX-BRD0014 or ROFNB 157

11 or ROFNB 157 11/2)

16-4

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Base Station – KRC 101 1371

Correct implementation of the automatic delay measurement requires that the base station be

connected to the Radio Exchange and powered when adding the base station using the CSMW

software. In previous installations the software requested the measured delay value. With the

above revisions, entering the default value of 0.1 microseconds will initiate the Auto Delay

Measurement. In the “Add Base Station” command process, the SLU/ CLU-S will talk to the base

station and determine the time delay. This determined value will never be displayed in any of the

system screens. The delay table will always reflect the value of .1 if it was chosen. If you enter

a TDR measured value other than 0.1, e.g.: 1.5, then this value will be used and displayed by the

system.

In automatic mode the system determines the cable delay measurement every time the base

station is powered, reset or when it is added.

Procedure

1. Install and terminate the Base Station cable with a RJ-45 connector.

2. Mount and connect the Base Station.

3. At the base station window, refresh and verify that the status is NEW for every Base Station to

be added. If it is not, then trouble shoot the lines and hardware. In addition, a red LED on

each of the CLU-S/SLU boards indicates a newly connected Base Station.

4. Add the Base Stations by selecting the CLU address, the base station port and the cable delay

value which can be set to automatic or manual.

5. After all of the Base Stations have been added, each new base station will have a "Pending”

status if the RE was initialized as a UTAM system. If the RE was initialized as a non-UTAM

system, the status will change to AVAILABLE.

6. Activate the Base Stations with the correct UTAM password if the RE was initialized as a

UTAM system.

7. Refresh the window to see the status of the new Base Stations as "Available."

8. Back up the system data.

9. Set two or more portables in engineering mode to perform a "walk around" test. Check for

proper system operation, voice quality, handovers, and coverage.

Note:

The new DCT1900 Auto Delay Measurement system does not eliminate the need to use a TDR.

The quality of the cable, and the possibility of wiring errors could negate the automatic

measurement capability.

The second method, using a TDR, is explained in the following paragraph.

Base Station delays are measured at the RE with a TDR connected first to cable data pair SC0

and then to cable SC1 with the cable open ended at the far end and then shorted at the far end.

While it is not necessary to determine the delay in the EPP pairs, if they are used, it is

recommended that these pairs be checked with the TDR to ensure that they are going to where

they are supposed to be and are not open/shorted anywhere.

1. Make sure that the Base Station cable is unplugged from the Base Station.

2. Disconnect the relevant connector from the relevant CLU or SLU.

3. Connect the TDR to cable pair SC0 or SC1 or EPP (refer to Chapter 25 on how to use the

TDR).

4. Measure the cable delay. The measured delay is the time between sending a pulse down the

line and receiving the echo. The resulting value must have an accuracy of 200 ns

(corresponding with 18–27 ft.).

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

16-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Base Station – KRC 101 1371

5. Enter the measured delay value into the correct column on the Base Station identification and

Location chart (refer to “Table 21-1, Example of Base Station Administration” in Chapter 21)

along with the Base Station number and location.

6. Repeat the delay measurement for all Base Stations connected to the CLU or SLU.

7. Re–connect the connectors to the CLU or SLU.

If applicable, repeat the delay measurement for the Base Stations connected to the other CLUs

and SLUs.

16.4 Installation Criteria

The Base Station should always be mounted such that the antennas are vertical with respect to

the floor or ceiling. Two types of antennas are available to facilitate the correct orientation of the

Base Station. One set is a vertical antenna for wall mounting of the Base Station and the other set

is a right angle antenna that allows the Base Station to be mounted on the ceiling.

The Base Station should never be mounted above the ceiling tiles as this reduces the coverage

area. Base Stations should not be mounted near large metal objects, such as pipes or air

conditioning conduits. Do not mount Base Stations directly on I-Beams or lamp poles, as these

objects tend to distort the RF field which reduces the effectiveness of the RF coverage area. Use

the Base Station outdoor wall mounting kit (see Paragraph 16.3.4) or a factory hanging device

(see Paragraph 16.3.2). Do not mount the Base Station more than 20 ft. high.

Note:

When mounting Base Stations near to each other to provide additional call capacity, it is necessary

to maintain at least 40 inches spacing between Base Stations.

The location where the Base Station is to be mounted is determined either by a previous site

survey or by the needs of the customer when adding to a system.

The following is a recommended order of installing a Base Station:

Base Station cable delay measurement

Mounting the Base Station - indoor

Mounting the Base Station - outdoor

Connecting the Base Station plug to the cable

16.5 Connecting the Base Station Plug to the Cable

Note:

Make sure that there is no power applied to the Base Station cable on which you are working.

Either the power cable or the signal cable on the front of the CLU/SLU should be disconnected

before connecting the cable to the RJ45 plug. -48V DC for powering the Base Stations is provided

between the data pairs and on the EPP wires.

1. Cut the Base Station cable to the correct length and connect the cable to the RJ45 Modular

Jack (see Fig. 16-2 Connector Pinning).

2. If an external power supply or AC/DC converter is used to power the Base Station, it is

recommended that this device be located in the last IDF in the signal path. Connection of the

output voltage from these devices will be made to the EPP pairs going out to the Base Station.

16-6

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Base Station – KRC 101 1371

Pin 1 = EPP1 - green/white

Pin 2 = EPP0 - white/green

Pin 3 = SC1-0 - white/blue

RJ45

modular jack

Pin 4 = SC0-0 - white/orange

Pin 5 = SC0-1 - orange/white

Pin 6 = SC1-1 - blue/white

SC=Serial Channel

EPP=Express Power Pair

NC=Not Connected

Fig. 16–2 Connector Pinning

Note:

After completion of the installation, Base Stations must be added using the CSMW “Installer Quick

Guide”.

16.6 Base Station Mounting - Indoor

16.6.1 Wall Mount

The Base Station comes with its own Base Station mounting bracket. The necessary antenna are

ordered and shipped separately. The Base Station is to be mounted such that when wall mounted

the top of the antenna is at least 6 inches below the ceiling. If the ceiling is made of metal or

contains a metal plate, the distance between the metal plate and the antenna must be at least one

foot.

Once the location where the Base Station is to be mounted has been determined, take the

mounting plate (see Fig. 16-1, Base Station Cover and Back) and spot it where the Base Station is

to be mounted.

1. Mark the location for the mounting hardware.

2. Secure the rear bracket to the wall. Use #6 mounting hardware. The side of the bracket with

the part no. SXANB 101 127/X goes towards the wall.

3. Plug the Base Station cable into either one of the RJ45 jacks on the back of the Base Station.

4. Place the Base Station over the rear plate on the wall and slide it down until the Base Station

locks in place onto the rear bracket.

5. Connect the antenna to the Base Station, then slide the rubber grommet supplied with the

antenna kit down over the antennas until they are firmly seated in the Base Station itself.

16.6.2 Ceiling Mount

A kit, part number NTM 201 1754 is provided for the ceiling mounting of base stations. Ine kit is

required for each ceiling mounted base station. Teh following instructions, also the kit are included

for reference.

Instructions - Ceiling Mount Kit

1. Cut out center portion of mounting clip to make room for ceiling clip threads.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

16-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Base Station – KRC 101 1371

Fig. 16-3 Cut Mounting Clip

2. Adhere plastic spacer to the mounting clip.

Fig. 16-4 Mounting Clip with Plastic Spacer

3. Assemble the mounting clip to the ceiling bracket.

From the bracket side, screw in the 6-32 screws with a #6 washer. Place mounting clip over

screws and lock each screw in place with a 6-32 lock nut and a #6 washer. DO NOT

OVERTIGHTEN.

Fig. 16-5 Ceiling Bracket

16-8

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Base Station – KRC 101 1371

4. Assemble the ceiling clips to the bracket.

Fig. 16-6 Attaching Ceiling Clips to the Ceiling Bracket

a. Twist ceiling clip clockwise into the bracket until it bottoms out on the bracket.

b. Twist ceiling clip counterclockwise less than 1/2 turn to the orientation shown below.

Fig. 16-7 Ceiling Clips Attached to Ceiling Bracket

5. Clip this assembly into the base station as shown. Disregard the arrows and "top"

embossments.

Fig. 16-8 Ceiling Bracket with Ceiling Clips attached to Base Station

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

16-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Base Station – KRC 101 1371

6. Screw in the two 1/4-20 screws with the captured star washers as shown. Check that the

assembly is locked to the base station.

Fig. 16-9 Inserting Washers into Ceiling Bracket

7. Twist the ceiling clips clockwise and then back counterclockwise onto the ceiling grid.

16.6.3 Base Station Mounting to Factory Ceiling (I Beams)

Direct mounting of the DCT1900 Base Station to an I beam in the ceiling is not allowed because of

the distortion caused to the radiated field pattern of the Base Station. Included in the following

discussion is a recommended method of securing the Base Station to the overhead while not

affecting the Base Stations’ radiation pattern.

16-10

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Base Station – KRC 101 1371

Mounting Technique

1: Small link chain, white or unpainted depending on ceiling

color. Purchased at Home Depot (or similar store).

TYPICAL (2) 6 foot lengths.

2: 1/8" Quick Link. Manufacturer - Campbell, p.n. 764-5106,

quantity of 4. Purchased at Home Depot.

3: #8 Screw Eye - Quantity of 4. Purchased at Home Depot.

4: 5.5" x5" piece of 3/4" thick Melamine. Purchased at Home

Depot and cut to size.

5: DCT1900 Base Station - DPY 102 162.

DB600-001

6: DCT1900 Right Angle Antenna Set - KRE 101 1750/55 -

quantity of 1.

7: Base Station cable connected to RJ45.

Fig. 16-10 Mounting to Factory Ceiling

The chain is to be used as two continuous pieces. Loop the chains around the I Beam and connect

them to the screw eyes with the Quick Links. (See Figure 16-10.)

Always use right angle antennas.

Once the Base Station is mounted and the cable is connected to the base station, make sure that

the Base Station cable is tie wrapped to one of the chains. This acts as a retention device so that

the Base Station does not slide off of the mounting bracket.

See Figure 16-11 for screw mounting dimensions.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

16-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Base Station – KRC 101 1371

1/2"

5.5"

1/2"

Bottom

mounting location for

screw eye

2.5"

1/2"

1.5"

Top

5.5"

2.25"

mounting points for the two wood

screws to secure the Base Station

mounting bracket

Fig. 16-11 Mounting Locations

16.7 Base Station Mounting - Outdoor

Warning: Installation of outside equipment is to be installed in accordance with required

electrical code to include NEC 725, 800, 810 AND CEC 54, 60 (Lightning and ground

requirements).

When mounting outdoors or to exterior building walls or large metal objects or to lamp posts, it is

imperative that the Base Station is not placed directly up against any or these objects. Use of the

outdoor/wall mounting kit, NTM 201 1718, is recommended. The following instructions are

contained within the outdoor/wall mounting kit, NTM 201 1718.

Outdoor Base Station Mounting Instruction

Introduction

For outdoor and campus applications, standard (indoor) DCT1900 Base Stations are mounted in

the weatherproof fiberglass housing. This industry recognized (NEMA, UL, IEC, CSA) housing is

designed for pole or wall-mounting commercial electronic and telephone equipment in outdoor

areas, as well as indoor industrial applications where chemical vapors and/or high dust

contamination exists.

Precise determination of Base Station location is identified at the time of an RF site survey to

provide optimal coverage (per Base Station). Housings can sometimes be directly mounted on

building surfaces, however radio coverage is generally not optimal under this condition. In

16-12

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Base Station – KRC 101 1371

locations where coverage area and range need to be optimized, it is important to mount Base

Stations several wavelengths (~6-18") away from building surfaces, and in the case of large metal

building surfaces, absolutely imperative.

The components within the Outdoor Base Station Mounting Kit provide this needed functionality.

The key components consist of two Mounting Plates and two Mounting Arms. The Small-Pattern

Mounting Plate is always used on the weatherproof housing (to avoid placing too much metal near

the Base Station). The Large-Pattern Mounting Plate is secured to the building surface. It has a

larger surface area with several hole spacings for flexibility in mounting on varied and irregular

building surfaces. The Mounting Arms are supplied in 3 lengths depending on the application

need. The combinations of these components provide the installer the ability to securely mount the

housing on almost any axis or location, as can be seen in Figure 16-12.

Weatherproof

Housing

Building

Side

Base Station

Mounting

Arm and

Plates

View

Building

Corner

Top View

Corner mounting

capitalizes on

omnidirectional

radiation pattern from

Base Station, avoiding

"blind spots" around

building corners.

Building surfaces and

architectural shapes present

challenges for mounting.

This mounting system

provides a wide variety of

options for positioning and

mounting the Base Stations.

Approximate dimensions

shown. Housing sizes vary

12.0

according to supplier

6.0

Fig. 16-12 Mounting Views

In many outdoor and campus applications, coverage is a major issue. To minimize the number of

Base Stations, they need to be strategically placed to create the best overlapping radio cells. For

example, it is common to place Base Stations at the corners of tall buildings to capitalize on the

omnidirectional radiation characteristics of the unit. The Mounting Kit provides this capability.

Mounting Instructions

1. Secure Large Pattern Mounting Plate to the Building Surface

The mounting plates and arm are made of lightweight aluminum, and the Weatherproof

Housing (including the Base Station) weighs approximately 7 lbs. To insure structural integrity

and safety, the mounting plate must be secured firmly to the building surface using at least

four of the 3/8" dia. stainless steel fasteners provided in the kit.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

16-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Base Station – KRC 101 1371

Note that mounting fasteners differ according to the building surface being mounted to.

When mounting to wood surfaces, standard 3/8" "lag bolts" are to be used. Generally

however, buildings of concrete and/or brick construction are most common. In these cases

the Mounting Plate must be secured with 4 expanding anchors suitable for this type of

construction. Two types of expanding anchors are included in the kit and must be installed as

follows:

Caution: Note that the correct anchor must be chosen for these types of construction and

must be mounted in 3/8" holes drilled at least 1 1/2" deep.

For solid concrete:

ITW Ramset/Red Head "Trubolt Wedge Anchor"

Part No. WW-3822 Tightened @ 25.ft. lbs.

For solid concrete,

hollow concrete block,

or brick:

ITW Ramset/Red Head "Dynabolt" Sleeves,

Part No. SHN-3817 Tightened @ 15 ft. lbs.

Proper installation of the above fasteners provides more than 1300 lbs. of pull or shear

strength (per fastener).

2. Secure the Base Station Mounting Bracket to the Inside of the Weatherproof Housing

See Figure 16-13. Locate the mounting bracket (supplied with the Base Station) in the position

and drill two 5/32” diameter holes for mounting. Apply a small amount of silicon-seal to the

surfaces. Next, secure the Base Station Mounting Bracket with two 6-32 x 5/8” pan-head

screws, locking hex nut and flatwashers provided.

3. Secure Small Pattern Mounting Plate to the Weatherproof Housing Outer Surface

See Figure 16-14 Position the Small Pattern Mounting Plate on the lower back side of the

weatherproof housing and, using it as a drill guide, drill four 0.375" diameter holes through the

housing. Apply a small amount of silicon rubber seal within and around the holes on the

INSIDE surface of the housing and then mount the plate in the orientation desired for the

application using the provided 3/8”-16 x 1” hardware (bolt, flatwasher and nut). The blot head

and washer shall be mounted from inside the housing as shown. Use silicon-seal to insure a

weatherproof seal around the bolt head and washer.

4. Provide Signal/Power Cable Access Into the Housing

Depending on the desired orientation of the weatherproof housing, choose a satisfactory

cable-entry point on or near the bottom of the housing and drill a 0.375" hole to accommodate

the provided 1/4" rubber grommet. Use silicon-seal to weatherproof this cable-entry as

needed.

5. Secure the Weatherproof Housing and Mounting Arm to the Plate Mounted on the Building

Surface

The weatherproof housing can now be attached to the building using either length of Mounting

Arm provided in the kit. It may be desirable to run the signal/power cable to the Base Station

inside the Mounting Arm, entering and exiting the cable through the slots provided. Using the

5/16"-18 bolt and locking hex-nut provided, lock the Mounting Arm in place using the locating

holes in the Mounting Plate tubes at each end. (Do not overtighten the hardware as this could

distort the tubes, making future disassembly difficult.)

16-14

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Base Station – KRC 101 1371

Caution: Mounting Arms of 12" and 18" are provided. The "creative" use of longer mounting

arms is NOT ALLOWED as considerable forces could be generated due to combinations of

housing weight, length of the mounting arm, wind loading, earthquakes and/or vibration.

These forces could result in pulling out the mounting anchors from the building with destructive

results including falling hardware, including possible injury or death to people below.

6. Complete the Installation of the Base Station

After securing the weatherproof housing to the building surface (above), terminate the signal/

power cable inside the housing with the recommended Modular Plug(s), leaving a service-loop

of approximately 12". Connect the Modular Plug(s) to the DCT1900 Base Station and install it

in the housing by hanging it on the bracket already mounted inside the housing from earlier

steps.

After verification of operation, secure the hinged door of the weatherproof housing.

6-32 x 5/8"

pan head

screw

Weatherproof Housing

6-32

Locking

hex-nut

(rear view)

Locate Base Station

Mounting Bracket

where shown and

drill .156 dia.

mounting holes.

2 1/4"

Mounting

Bracket

(shipped with

Base Station)

4.0"

flatwasher

5.0"

Fig. 16-13 Base Station Mounting Bracket Attachment to Housing

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

16-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Base Station – KRC 101 1371

Weatherproof

Housing (rear view)

Locate Small

Pattern

3/8"

Hex Nut

3/8"

Flat

Washer

Mounting

Plate where

shown and

drill .375 dia.

mounting

holes

3/8"

Bolt

3.0"

5.0"

Fig. 16-14 Mounting Plate Attachment to Housing

.156r

2.50 X .312 slot, 2 places

(both ends, one side of tube only)

.312 dia

4 places

Dimension A Length

Part Number

1301-SXA 120 8411/1

1301-SXA 120 8411/2

1302-SXA 120 8411/3

6.00"

12.00"

18.00"

0.975

Dimension A

(see table)

SCALE: 1:1

NOTES:

Material: 1.00" Schedule 40 6061-T6 aluminum tubing (O.D. = 1.315", Wall = 0.133")

Finish: clear anodize type II

Dimensions: X.XX = +/- .030", X.XXX = +/- .010"

Fig. 16-15 Mounting Arm

16-16

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Base Station – KRC 101 1371

weld tubing full

circumference to plate

2 places.

.437 D

4 places

1.00 Dia drain

hole

0.25 drain hole

2 places

0.50

1.50

3.50

4.50

5.00

Fig. 16-16 Mounting Plate (Small Pattern)

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

16-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Base Station – KRC 101 1371

.437 D

8 places

weld tubing full

circumference to plate

2 places.

1.00 Dia drain

hole

2 places

0.25 drain hole

4.00

Fig. 16-17 Mounting Plate (Large Pattern)

16-18

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet Connection Board (MCCB) - ROANB 101 28

CHAPTER 17

Modular Cabinet Connection Board (MCCB) - ROANB 101 28

17.1 Board Description

The MCCB (see Fig. 17–3) is installed on the bottom of the Modular Cabinet above the bottom

plate. The MCCB is used to make the following interconnections:

Between the backplane power and a maximum of 3 CLUs/SLUs for powering Base Stations.

Between the external power input and a maximum of 7 CLUs/SLUs for powering Base

Stations.

Between the PBX signalling ground to a maximum of 7 LTUs when earth signalling is used

(instead of timed break signalling).

Between the CPU, a PC, and a printer or TAP 1.8 compliant device.

Between the general alarm output of the CPU and an alarm device.

A maximum of 3 CLUs/SLUs can be provided with Base Station power via the backplane. In that

case the 48V from the backplane is connected to the PW–BP input of the MCCB (see Fig. 17–1).

When more CLUs have to be powered, an external -48V power supply can be connected to the

PW–EXT input of the MCCB. In this way a maximum of 7 CLUs can be powered.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

17-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet Connection Board (MCCB) - ROANB 101 28

PW1

PW2

PW7

PW-BP

Backplane power

PW3

PW4

PW5

PW6

Fuse F1

)

PW-EXT

Power filter

Ground

bridge

PW1

PW2

PW7

Fuse F2

Power filter

External power

Fig. 17–1 Power Distribution on the MCCB

Fuses

The MCCB is provided with two fast 15A fuses (see Fig. 17–1 and Fig. 17–3) to protect the

external power supply from short circuit. Only use the following fuses: 7006100123, 250/15A.

DTU Cable Ground Strap Settings

The straps on the MCCB connect the cable shield of the PBX/MCCB coax cables to ground. The

MCCB is delivered with all straps in the ground position (see Fig. 17–2). This setting gives the best

EMC protection.

17-2

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet Connection Board (MCCB) - ROANB 101 28

T U O - C T D

Open

Ground

Fig. 17–2 DTU Coax Cable Ground Strap Settings on MCCB

DTC In/Out Connectors

There are two rows of connectors for connection of the DTU-E1 coaxial cables. Each row has

connectors for up to 8 DTU-E1 input and output cables.

Due to the construction of the cabinet and the placement of the MCCB, two connectors on the

DTC In side and two connectors on the DTC Out side cannot be used. Refer to Fig. 17-3 and use

only the labelled connectors DTC 1-6.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

17-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet Connection Board (MCCB) - ROANB 101 28

Connectors

Ground bridge

: For connecting the plus pole of PW–EXT to ground.

DTC1, DTC2, DTC3, DTC4,

DTC5, DTC6 (DTC–OUT)

: For connection of 6 coaxial DTU-E1 cables (PBX/MCCCB

cables) to the PBX.

DTC1, DTC2, DTC3, DTC4,

DTC5, DTC6 (DTC–IN)

: For connection of 6 coaxial DTU-E1 cables (DTU/MCCB

cables) to the DTU.

GA–IN

: For connection of the General Alarm input (General Alarm

cable) from the CPU board.

GA–OUT

: General Alarm output to alarm device.

LTU1, LTU2, LTU3, LTU4,

LTU5, LTU6, LTU7

: For signalling ground cables (LTU/MCCB ground cable) to 7

LTUs.

PBX

: For the signalling ground connection to the PBX. This

connection is only used when earth signalling is used.

: For connection to PC (PC Cable).

: For connection to printer (printer cable).

PW–BP

: For the power connection to the backplane (MCCB power

cable, for Base Station powering).

PW1, PW2, PW3

(backplane power)

: For power cable to 3 CLUs/SLUs (CLU/MCCB power cable)

when using the backplane power.

PW–EXT:

: For optional external power supply (for Base Station powering).

PW1, PW2, PW3, PW4, PW5, : For power cable to 7 CLUs/SLUs (CLU/MCCB power cable)

PW6, PW7 (external power)

when using external power.

RS232

: For cable to CPU for PC and printer (RS232 to MCCB cable).

17.2 Installation

The Modular Cabinet is delivered with the MCCB mounted. The cables to the CPU are already

connected to the MCCB. For installation of these cables and the installation of the other cables

refer to the relevant chapters.

17-4

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet Connection Board (MCCB) - ROANB 101 28

Fig. 17-3 Modular Cabinet Connection Board (MCCB) - ROANB 101 28

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

17-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet Connection Board (MCCB) - ROANB 101 28

17-6

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Synchronization Distribution Board (SDB) – REX-BRD0006 or ROANB 101 38

CHAPTER 18

Synchronization Distribution Board (SDB) – REX-BRD0006 or ROANB

101 38

18.1 Board Description

The SDB (see Fig. 18–1) if installed is located on the bottom plate of the Modular Cabinet near the

MCCB and allows the connection of one input and three output synchronization signals to the CPU

via shielded twisted pairs cables. The synchronization signals are required to achieve PWT air

interface synchronization between systems to allow seamless inter system handovers. An

electrical schematic diagram is shown in Fig. 18–2. This board is not factory installed.

Note: Refer to Chapter 20 for CPU2 synchronization.

SYNC

Screw holes

SYNC

OUT 1

SYNC

OUT 2

SYNC

OUT 3

Fig. 18-1 Synchronization Distribution Board - REX-BRD0006 or ROANB 101 38

Connectors

X1, X2, X3

X5, X6, X7

: External cable connection sync out.

: External cable connection sync in.

: Sync out connection to CPU.

: Sync in connection to CPU.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

18-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Synchronization Distribution Board (SDB) – REX-BRD0006 or ROANB 101 38

1 2 3 4

To CPU ---------------------------------------------------------

CIRCUIT GND

RJ Connectors

To other

CPU

3 4 5 6

GND(shield)

SYNC OUT

SYNC IN

Fig. 18–2 Electrical Schematic Diagram

18.2 Installation

The SDB comes as part of the installation set sync port kit (NTMNB 101 107) and must be installed

in the cabinet where the CPU1 is going to reside (refer to Paragraph 4.7 of Chapter 4). For the

installation of the cables to the CPU1 refer to Chapter 19, CPU1 Cabling. The external sync in and

out cables are part of the sync port kit and are required if PWT air interface synchronization is

needed in a multi DCT1900 system environment. They must meet the requirements in Paragraph

18.3 (see Figure 18-3).

18.3 External Sync Cable

When there are multiple DCT1900 systems with overlapping coverage areas it is necessary to

synchronize the CPUs of the systems together. This is done by connecting an external sync cable

from one of the sync out ports on the master CPU’s sync board to the sync in port on one of the

slave CPU’s sync board.

A pre-made external sync cable, TSR 951 284, is available. The specifications for this cable are

included below. If this cable is not long enough then a cable must be constructed on site. Refer to

the enclosed specifications to construct this cable. If the 6 conductor shielded flat cable is not

available then a single pair of 120 ohm twisted shielded pair may be used.

The signal delay in the external sync cable must be determined. For the cable TSR 951 284 it is

0.04μs. A cable made on site must be measured using a TDR (Refer to Paragraph 18.4).

Once the delay is known, this value is entered into the slave system’s CPU during its’ initialization.

Refer to the Cordless System Software User’s Guide (LZB 119 2664), Appendix I, on how to enter

this delay.

18-2

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Synchronization Distribution Board (SDB) – REX-BRD0006 or ROANB 101 38

External Sync Cable (TSR 951 284)

Cable length

Wires

Working Voltage

: 20 ft.

: 6 conductor shielded flat cable

: 300V

Connector - System/Sync Port : 6 pin shielded RJ 12 connector

Connector - Modem

: 6 pin shielded RJ 12 connector

SYNC

OUT

SYNC

GND(shield)

Figure 18–3 Wiring Diagram External Sync Cable

18.4 Sync Input Cable Delay Measurement

The external sync input cable delay must be measured in order to input the system

synchronization delay into the system at initialization. The system synchronization delay

compensates for the delay introduced by the cable. The external sync input cable delay is

measured as follows:

1. Make sure that the other end of the external sync input cable is not connected.

2. Connect a TDR to the terminals 3 and 4 on this end.

3. Measure the cable delay. The resulting value must have an accuracy of 50ns (corresponding

to 16ft. – 33ft.).

4. Note the cable delay value.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

18-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Synchronization Distribution Board (SDB) – REX-BRD0006 or ROANB 101 38

18-4

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – Power Cabling

CHAPTER 19

Modular Cabinet – Power Cabling

19.1 Introduction

This chapter describes the installation of the power cables in two different versions of the Modular

Cabinet. The installation depends on the number of external -48Vdc power supplies and on how

the Base Stations are powered.

WARNING

Disconnect or switch off all power supply sources before servicing any power

supply circuit.

19.2 Modular Cabinet - BDVNB 101 01/3 (R2, R3)

Fig. 19–1 shows the power distribution in a Modular Cabinet powered by external -48Vdc supplies.

MODULAR

CABINET

BACKPLANE

+ 5 V

+ 12 V

* 12 V

System

Boards

X102

48 Vdc

Terminal

TERMINAL BLOCK A

₍B_Sl_Eo_Eck_FIGA_{. 19-2)}

(see Figure 16-2)

X112, X113

Piggy-back

FASTON

TRENB

101 05

-4

8Vdcdc

Mains

filter

TRENB

101 03

TSRNB

101 33

15 A

PW-BP

PW1

PW2

PW3

MCCB

Terminal

^TB^ERlo^Mc^Ik^NALB^BL(s^Oe^Ce^{K B}

(SEE FIG. 19-2)

Figure 16-2)

PW1

Power Supplies

External -48Vdc

PW2

PW7

15 A

CLUs

PW-EXT

PW3

PW4

PW5

PW6

15 A

Fig. 19-1 Power Distribution Powered by External -48Vdc

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

19-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – Power Cabling

Factory Fitted Power Cabling

The Modular Cabinet is delivered with the following powering cables fitted:

Cable TRENB 101 02 (#190248) between the filter and the fuse holders (see Fig. 19–3).

Cable TRENB 101 04 (#190250) between the switch and the two fuse holders.

Cable TRENB 101 05 (#190251)between the switch and connector X112, X113 on the

backplane (see Fig. 19–4). The end of the cable with the piggy–back faston is connected to

the switch.

Cable TRENB 101 03 (#190249)between connectors X112/X113 and connector PW–BP on

the MCCB.

Cable #190253 (red cable) in two locations: between terminal block A and filter and between

terminal block B and MCCB terminal PW-BP (see Fig. 19-2).

Cable #190254 (black cable) in two locations: between terminal block A and filter and

between terminal block B and MCCB terminal PW-EXT (see Fig. 19-2).

All cables are connected with the red wires (+) connected at the left–hand side, except for the PW-

EXT connection. The red wire of cable TRENB 101 03 is connected to connector X112(+).

In the following paragraphs it is assumed that the cables are fitted as described above. If you

altered the wiring, change it as described above.

Red

Black

Warning

Torque the terminal screws

to 7 in./lb.

Red

Black

Additional wires to external

-48Vsupply

Black

Red

Additional wires to external

-48V supply

MCCB

-48V supply

Fig. 19–2 Power Connection to the Modular Cabinet

19-2

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – Power Cabling

DC: +

Top of Filter

Filter

DC: -

Power on/off switch

Fuses

(2 each - 7006100123 15 A/250 V)

Fig. 19–3 Power Connections to Top of Filter

X102

AC input connector

X112

DC input/output connectors

X113

Fig. 19–4 Power Connections on the Backplane

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

19-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – Power Cabling

19.3 Installation

Modular Cabinet Powered by an External 300 Watt –48Vdc Power Supply

When the Modular Cabinet is powered by an external -48V power supply, Base Station power can

be supplied to the CLUs/SLUs in the following ways:

to maximum 3 CLUs/SLUs via the backplane PW-BP connection on the MCCB

to maximum 4 CLUs/SLUs via the PW–EXT connection on the MCCB

The advantage of powering via the backplane is that the Base Station is switched off when the

Modular Cabinet is switched off by the switch on the cabinet.

When combining both methods, a maximum of 7 CLUs/SLUs can be provided with Base Station

power.

Modular cabinet powered by a -48Vdc PBX power supply

When the modular cabinet is powered by a -48Vdc PBX power supply, Base Station power can

be supplied into the CLUs/SLUs in the following ways:

to a maximum of 3 CLUs/SLUs via the PW-BP connection on the MCCB

to a maximum of 7 CLUs/SLUs via the PW-EXT connection on the MCCB

When combining both methods, a maximum of 9 CLUs/SLUs can be provided with Base

Station power.

WARNING

When using the PBX power supply, make sure that the capacity of the

supply is sufficient to power both the PBX and the Modular Cabinet.

Base Station Power Supplied to a Maximum of 3 CLUs via the Backplane

Fig.19–5 gives a schematic diagram of this configuration. Fig. 19-6 gives the cable diagram of this

configuration.

PW-BP

CLU/

Backplane

MCCB

SLU

External

Source

-48V

Internal

Modular Cabinet

Fig. 19-5 Schematic Diagram of Powering the Modular Cabinet

and 3 CLUs/SLUs by an External Source

1. Connect a power cable from terminal block A to the DC power source.

Note:

The positive pole of the external DC source is connected to the ground of the Modular Cabinet via

the backplane and a jumper from the (+) side of the input filter.

19-4

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – Power Cabling

X112 red

X113 black

TR EN B 101 03

TR EN B 101 05

Back

Plane

TSRN B 101 33

Ferrite Bead to be

installed

during installation

Black

R ed

from external

source (PBX)

PW -BP

-48Vdc

PW 1

PW 2

PW 3

Fuse

PW 5 PW 6PW 7

PW 1

PW -EXT

PW 4

PW 3 PW 2

M CC B

G round Bridge

Fig. 19–6 Cable Diagram of Powering the Modular Cabinet and

3 CLUs/SLUs by an External Source

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

19-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – Power Cabling

Base Station Power Supplied to a Maximum of 7 CLUs/SLUs via the PW–EXT Input on the

MCCB

This requires a power supply with a capacity greater than 300W, such as a PBX power supply.

Fig. 19–7A & Fig. 19-7B give a schematic diagram of this configuration. Fig. 19–8 gives the cable

diagram of this configuration.

PW- EXT

CLU/

SLU

ext

-48V

PW-BP

MCCB

Backplane

Internal

Modular Cabinet

Fig. 19-7A - Schematic Diagram of Powering Modular Cabinet and 7 CLUs/SLUs with an External

Power Supply

ext

PW-EXT

-48V

CLU/

SLU

ext

-48V

PW-BP

Backplane

MCCB

Internal

Modular Cabinet

Fig. 19-7B Schematic Diagram of Powering the Modular Cabinet and 7 CLUs/SLUs with two

separate -48V External Power Supply

19-6

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – Power Cabling

X112 red

X113 black

Back

Plane

TRENB 101 05

TSRNB 101 33

To other

CLUs/

SLUs

Ferrite Bead to be

installed

during installation

Black

from external

source

Red

PW-BP

-48Vdc

(PBX)

PW1

PW2

PW3

Fuse

PW5 PW6PW7

PW1

PW-EXT

PW4

PW3 PW2

MCCB

Ground

Bridge

Fig. 19–8 Cable Diagram of Powering the Modular Cabinet and 7 CLUs by an External Source

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

19-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – Power Cabling

19.4 Modular Cabinet - REX-BAS9021A/1B

Figure 19–9 shows the power distribution in a Modular Cabinet powered by external -48Vdc

supplies.

MODULAR

CABINET

BACKPLANE

+ 5 V

+ 12 V

* 12 V

System

Boards

X102

48 Vdc

Terminal

TERMINAL BLOCK A

Block

Piggy-back

Faston

(SEE FIG. 19-10)

(see Figure 16-2)

X112, X113

Piggy-back

FASTON

TRENB

101 05

External -48Vdc

External 48 Vdc

Mains

filter

TRENB

101 03

TSRNB

101 33

15 A

PW-BP

PW1

PW2

PW3

MCCB

Terminal

^TEB^RMlo^INc^Ak^{L B}B^LO(^Cs^Kee^B

(SEE FIG. 19-10)

Figure 16-2)

PW1

Power Supplies

External -48Vdc

PW2

PW7

15 A

CLUs

PW-EXT

PW3

PW4

PW5

PW6

15 A

Fig. 19-9 Power Distribution Powered by External -48Vdc

19-8

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – Power Cabling

Factory Fitted Power Cabling

The Modular Cabinet is delivered with the following powering cables fitted:

Cable TRENB 101 02 (190248) between the filter and the lower fuse holders (see Figure 19–

11).

Cable TRENB 101 04 (#190250) between the switch and the lower two fuse holders.

Cable between the switch and the upper fuse holders. The end of the cable with piggy-back

faston is connected to the switch.

Cable between the switch and connector PW–BP on the MCCB. Connects to piggy-back

faston on the switch.

Cable between the upper fuse holders and connector X112, X113 on the backplane (see

Figure 19–12).

Cable #190253 (red cable) in two locations: between terminal block A and filter and between

terminal block B and MCCB terminal PW-EXT (see Figure 19-10).

Cable #190254 (black cable) in two locations: between terminal block A and filter and

between terminal block B and MCCB terminal PW-BP (see Fig. 19-10).

All cables are connected with the red wires (+) connected at the left–hand side except for PW-EXT

connection. The red wire of cable is connected to connector X112(+).

In the following paragraphs it is assumed that the cables are fitted as described above. If you

altered the wiring, change it as described above.

Red

Black

Warning

Torque the terminal screws

to 7 in./lb.

Red

Black

Additional wires to

Red

external -48Vdc

Additional wires to external

PW-EXT

MCCB

-48V supply

Botton view

Fig. 19-10 Power Connection to the Modular Cabinet

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

19-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – Power Cabling

Upper Fuses

(3A/250V)

Wrist Strap connector

Switch

Filter

Lower Fuse

(15A/250V)

Fig. 19–11 Power Connections to Top of Filter

X102

AC input connector

X112

DC input/output connectors

X113

Fig. 19–12 Power Connections on the Backplane

19-10

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – Power Cabling

19.5 Installation

Modular Cabinet Powered by an External 300Watt -48Vdc Power Supply

When the Modular Cabinet is powered by an external -48V power supply, Base Station power can

be supplied to the CLUs/SLUs in the following ways:

to maximum 3 CLUs/SLUs via the backplane PW-BP connection on the MCCB

to maximum 4 CLUs/SLUs via the PW–EXT connection on the MCCB

The advantage of powering via the backplane is that the Base Station is switched off when the

Modular Cabinet is switched off by the switch on the cabinet.

When combining both methods, a maximum of 7 CLUs/SLUs can be provided with Base Station

power.

Modular cabinet powered by a -48Vdc PBX power supply

When the modular cabinet is powered by a -48Vdc PBX power supply, Base Station power can

be supplied into the CLUs/SLUs in the following ways:

to a maximum of 3 CLUs/SLUs via the PW-BP connection on the MCCB

to a maximum of 7 CLUs/SLUs via the PW-EXT connection on the MCCB

When combining both methods, a maximum of 9 CLUs/SLUs can be provided with Base

Station power.

Warning

When using the PBX power supply, make sure that the capacity of the supply

is sufficient to power both the PBX and the Modular Cabinet.

Base Station Power Supplied to a Maximum of 3 CLUs via the Backplane

Figure 19–13 gives a schematic diagram of this configuration. Figure 19-14 gives the cable

diagram of this configuration.

CLU/

SLU

PW-BP

MCCB

Backplane

External

Source

-48V

Internal

Modular Cabinet

Fig. 19-13 Schematic Diagram of Powering the Modular Cabinet and 3 CLUs/SLUs by an External

Source

1. Connect a power cable from terminal block A to the DC power source.

Note:

The positive pole of the external DC source is connected to the ground of the Modular Cabinet via

the backplane and a jumper from the (+) side of the input filter.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

19-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – Power Cabling

X112 red

X113 black

3A fuses

Back

Plane

TSRN B 101 33

Ferrite Bead to be

installed

during installation

Black

R ed

from external

source (PBX)

PW -BP

-48Vdc

PW 1

PW 2

PW 3

Fuse

PW 1

PW 5 PW 6PW 7

PW -EXT

PW 4

PW 3 PW 2

M CC B

G round Bridge

Fig. 19–14 Cable Diagram of Powering the Modular Cabinet and

3 CLUs/SLUs by an External Source

19-12

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – Power Cabling

Base Station Power Supplied to a Maximum of 7 CLUs/SLUs via the PW–EXT Input on the

MCCB

This requires a power supply with a capacity of greater than 300W, such as a PBX power supply.

Figures 19–15A & 19-15B give a schematic diagram of this configuration. Figure 19–16 gives the

cable diagram of this configuration.

PW-

EXT

CLU/

SLU

ext

-48V

PW-BP

Backplane

MCCB

Internal

Modular Cabinet

Fig. 19 -15A - Schematic Diagram of Powering Modular Cabinet and 7 CLUs/SLUs with an

External Power Supply

ext

PW-

EXT

-48V

CLU/

SLU

PW-BP

ext

-48V

Backplane

Internal

Modular Cabinet

Fig. 19-15B Schematic Diagram of Powering the Modular Cabinet and 7 CLUs/SLUs with two

separate -48V External Power Supply

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

19-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – Power Cabling

X112 red

X113 black

3A fuses

Back

Plane

TRENB 101 05

TSRNB 101 33

To other

CLUs/

SLUs

Ferrite Bead to be

installed

during installation

Black

from external

source

Red

PW-BP

-48Vdc

(PBX)

PW1

PW2

PW3

PW5 PW6PW7

PW1

PW-EXT

PW4

PW3 PW2

MCCB

Ground

Bridge

Fig.19–16 Cable Diagram of Powering the Modular Cabinet and 7 CLUs by an External Sources

19-14

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – CPU Cabling

CHAPTER 20

Modular Cabinet – CPU Cabling

20.1 Introduction

This chapter describes all the cabling connected to the CPU1, REX-BRD0004 or 2/ROFNB 157

19/2, and to the CPU2, REX-BRD9033 or REX-BRD9034.

Connections to the CPU1/CPU2 board include:

•

Printers - via the MCCB board

PCs - via the MCCB board

Other CPU boards - via the SDB or directly

Alarm Devices - via the MCCB board

Warning

The printer and PC must be placed in a restricted area if connected directly to

the modular cabinet.

The printer and PC must be connected to AC mains with a suitable power cord:

safety earth to safety earth, non-earth to non-earth (the safety earth must be

guaranteed).

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

20-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – CPU Cabling

20.2 CPU1 Cabling

Sync in

Sync out 1

To 4x CPU/SDB

Twisted Pair Sync cables

(TSRNB 101 48), refer to Figure 1-2.

Sync out 2

Sync out 3

Refer to Figure 20-2

Printer port

RS232-A

PC port

To CPU/MCCB

Serial Connection cable

(TSRNB 101 26)

RS232-B

Not used

To General Alarm cable

(TSRNB 101 28)

General Alarm port

Fig. 20-1 Connections to the CPU1

Connections to the MCCB

1. Remove the tie-wrap that is holding the CPU/MCCB serial connection cable (TSRNB 101 26)

and the general alarm cable (TSRNB 101 28) together. Both cables are already connected to

the MCCB.

2. Connect the CPU/MCCB serial connection cable (TSRNB 101 26) to the Printer and PC port

on the CPU (see Figure 20-1).

3. Connect the General Alarm cable (TSRNB 101 28) to the General Alarm port on the CPU.

20-2

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – CPU Cabling

CPU

TSRNB 101 48

Sync in

to backplane

Sync out 1

Sync out 2

Sync out 3

Sync in (from master)

SDB

External sync cables

Sync out 3 (to slave)

Sync out 2 (to slave)

Sync out 1 (to slave)

Fig. 20-2 Connections to SDB

Connections to the SDB

For the connections to the SDB also refer to Chapter 18:

1. Ensure that the SDB is installed on the bottom plate of the cabinet and that the CPU strap set-

tings are in the proper position. The required material is part of the installation set, sync port kit

(NTMNB 101 107).

2. Connect the CPU/SDB Twisted Pair Sync cables (TSRNB 101 48) as indicated in Figure 20–2

(see also Figure 20–1).

3. Connect the external sync in cable to a sync out outlet of another DCT1900 when this CPU is

not the synchronization master.

4. Connect the external sync out cables to the sync in inlets of the DCT1900 systems that are

synchronization slaves to this CPU.

5. Fasten the external sync cables to the cable tie blocks on the ground strip (see Figure 20–3)

using tie wraps.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

20-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – CPU Cabling

Cable tie blocks

Fig. 20-3 Cable Tie Blocks on the Ground Strip

Connection to the PC, Printer, and SMS System

1. Connect PC cable (TSRNB 101 22D) to the PC connector on the MCCB and to the PC.

2. Connect the printer cable (TSRNB 101 23) to the PR connector on the MCCB and to the

printer. For Short Message Service (SMS), connect the printer connector on the MCCB to the

RS232 on the PC running the SMS application using cable TSRNB 101 23 (DB25) or TSRNB

101 22D (DB9).

3. Fasten the cables to the cable tie blocks on the ground strip (see Figure 20–3) using tie wraps.

20-4

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – CPU Cabling

GA-OUT

Contact rating: 10VA (peak)

Switching max: 200Vdc or 141Vac

Switching current max: 0.75Adc or 0.53Aac

Relay is activated

when there is no alarm

3₃

Fig. 20-4 General Alarm Connector (MCCB)

Connection to Alarm Device

The General Alarm relay is normally activated when the Modular Cabinet is switched on. If the

CPU generates a general alarm, the alarm relay is deactivated.

1. Connect an alarm device to the GA–OUT connector on the MCCB (see Figure 20–4). When

the alarm device needs to make contact, connect the alarm device between contacts 1 and 2.

When the alarm device needs to break contact, connect the alarm device between contacts 2

and 3.

2. Fasten the cable to the cable tie blocks on the ground strip (see Figure 20–3) using a tie wrap.

20.3 Synchronization Data Board (SDB) replacement Cable (AWS1154)

The SDB and its attendant cables have been replaced with a simpler, easier to install cable

assembly. The cable assembly connects directly to the front of the CPU1 board. No internal

cables or SDB are required when using this cable.

The part number for this cable is AWS1153 and it is a 25 feet long.

CPU1 Sync Port Pin Connections

The CPU1 board uses a modular type plug for connection to the Sync In and Sync Out connectors.

(see Figure 20-5).

The connector pins are arranged by column and row. There are 3 columns on the connector,

designated A, B, and C. There are seven rows of pins numbered 1-7. To identify the pins, while

holding the connector as if to plug it into the board, the part number marking (RNV 304 002)

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

20-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – CPU Cabling

should be on the left, with the pins facing towards you. Pin A1 is in the upper left corner, while pin

C7 is in the lower right corner.

Note: There are no pins in rows 2, 4, or 6. The pins that will be utilized for the Sync signal are

pins A3 and C5 (blue pair). The same pin-out is used for both the input and the output connectors.

Connecting CPU1 to CPU1

Slave 1

25 feet

Slave 2

A B C

Master

White/Blue

Slave 3

Blue/White

This is a straight through cable.

Connect pins A3 on both ends (White/Blue)

Connect pins C5 on both ends (Blue/White)

Note: The Sync Pulse in on pins A3 and C5.

The cable delay is 40 nanoseconds at 25 feet (entered in the Slave(s) configuration)

No SDB required.

Connect from Master output(s) to Slave Input. For runs more than 25 feet, cut the cable

and cross-connect at main frame using White/Blue and Blue/White. Measure delay and enter into

Slave configuration in nanoseconds.

Fig. 20-5 CPU1 Sync Replacement Cable (AWS1154)

Connection of the Sync Cable

CPU1 to CPU1 (Figure 20-5)

When connecting a CPU1 to another CPU1, it is only necessary to connect the output of the

master to the input of the slave. Locate an output position, insert the cable, and plug the other end

into the slave CPU input. Enter the delay into the slave CPU configuration, and ensure that the

option straps are set properly (Refer to Section 5, Chapter 5, CPU1 Board). Once this information

is entered, and the straps are set properly, create a service report using CSMW and check the

slave CPU. It should show SLAVE, SYNC AVE.

For runs up to 25 feet, the cable provided has a delay of 40 nanoseconds. For runs longer than 25

feet, it will be necessary to cut the provided cable, and terminate it at the punch down blocks at

both ends. Cross connect the blue pair (straight connection), and using a Time Domain

Reflectometer (TDR), read the delay in nanoseconds, and enter the value into the slave CPU.

20-6

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – CPU Cabling

20.4 CPU2 Cabling

To CPU/MCCB

serial connection cable

TSRNB 101 26

To General Alarm Cable

TSRNB 101 28

Fig. 20-6 CPU2 Board Connections

Connections to the MCCB

1. Remove the tie-wrap that is holding the CPU/MCCB serial connection cable (TSRNB 101 26)

and the General Alarm cable (TSRNB 101 28) together. Both cables are already connected to

the MCCB.

2. Connect the CPU/MCCB serial connection cable (TSRNB 101 26) to the Printer and PC port

on the CPU (see Figure 20-6).

3. Connect the General Alarm cable (TSRNB 101 28) to the General Alarm port on the CPU.

Connection to the PC, Printer, and SMS System

1. Connect PC cable (TSRNB 101 22D) to the PC connector on the MCCB and to the PC.

2. Connect the printer cable (TSRNB 101 23) to the PR connector on the MCCB and to the

printer. For Short Message Service (SMS), connect the printer connector on the MCCB to the

RS232 on the PC running the SMS application using cable TSRNB 101 23 (DB25) or TSRNB

101 22D (DB9).

3. Fasten the cables to the cable tie blocks on the ground strip (see Figure 20–3) using tie wraps.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

20-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – CPU Cabling

Connection to Alarm Device

The General Alarm relay is normally activated when the Modular Cabinet is switched on. If the

CPU generates a general alarm, the alarm relay is deactivated.

1. Connect an alarm device to the GA–OUT connector on the MCCB (see Figure 20–4). When

the alarm device needs to make contact, connect the alarm device between contacts 1 and 2.

When the alarm device needs to break contact, connect the alarm device between contacts 2

and 3.

2. Fasten the cable to the cable tie blocks on the ground strip (see Figure 20–3) using a tie wrap.

CPU2 Sync Port Connector

The CPU2 has two RJ45 connectors, one for Sync In and one for Sync Out. (Figure 20-6)

The RJ-45 pins are identified as pins 1-8. While holding the RJ-45 connector with the locking tab

down and looking into the end that the cable is inserted into, pin 1 is on the far left, and pin 8 is on

the far right. Only pins 4 and 5 (orange pair) are used on the Input. The Output uses pins 1 & 2

(blue pair), 4 & 5 (orange pair), and 7 & 8 (green pair), providing 3 output signals on one cable.

CPU2 Sync Cable (AWS1153)

The cable used to synchronize 2 or more CPU2 boards is AWS1153. This cable is 25 ft. long and

is terminated at both ends in RJ45 connectors. The measured delay for this cable is 40

nanoseconds.

Connection to the Sync Cable

CPU2 to CPU2 - 2 REs (Figure 20-7)

When connecting a CPU2 to another CPU2, connect the sync cable, AWS1153 between the Sync

Out on the Master Radio Exchange CPU2 board and the Sync In on the Slave Radio Exchange

CPU2 board. Make sure that both the Master and Slave CPU2 boards are strapped correctly.

Refere to CPU2 board Section 5, Chapter 6. Enter the cable dealy, for this cable, 40 nanoseconds

into the Slave CPU2.

20-8

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – CPU Cabling

AWS 1153

Master

Slave 1

Out

Fig. 20-7 CPU2 Sync Cable for up to 2 REs

CPU2 to CPU2 - More than 2 REs (Figure 20-8)

When connecting more than 2 REs together using CPU2, it will be necessary to cut the supplied

cable, AWS1153, and terminate it to a punch-down block. From the master CPU2, the outputs will

be on the blue, orange, and green pairs. Cross-connect each output to the orange pair of each

slave’s cable. Measure the delay of each cable, and enter the value into each slave’s

configuration in nanoseconds.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

20-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – CPU Cabling

Slave 1

RJ-45

White/Orange

CAT 5

Cable

CAT 5

Cable

66 Block

Out

Master

Orange/White

Output

White/Blue

Blue/White

Slave 2

CAT 5

Cable

White/Orange

Orange/White

White/Orange

Orange/White

RJ-45

White/Green

Green/White

Out

CAT 5

Cable

White/Orange

Slave 3

Orange/White

RJ-45

Make a cable for each Slave CPU using only pins 4 and 5 of the

RJ-45, and connect to the Master Output on the 66 block as per the diagram.

Out

Daisy chaining is possible using each Slave as a master for a

Sub-cluster configuration (maximum of 2 levels of slaves).

The cable delay must be measured for each connection, entered in each slave’s configuration

in nanoseconds.

Fig. 20-8 CPU2 Sync Cable for more than 2 REs

20.5 Mixing CPU1 and CPU2 based Systems

Connection of the Sync Cable

CPU1 to CPU2 - CPU 1 Master (Figure 20-9)

When connecting CPU1 master to CPU2 slave, it will be necessary to cut the supplied cables and

terminate them at the punch-down blocks. Cross connect the CPU1 blue pair to the CPU2 orange

pair, pins 4 & 5 in the RJ45. Measure the delay, and enter the value into the CPU2 (slave)

configuration in nanoseconds.

CPU2 to CPU1 - CPU2 Master, Multiple REs (Figure 20-10)

If connecting a CPU2 as master with a CPU1 as a slave, it will be necessary to cut the supplied

cables and terminate them at on a punch down block. The CPU2 will have an output on the blue,

orange, and green pairs, while the CPU1 will have an input on the blue pair. Cross connect one of

the CPU2 outputs to the blue pair of the CPU1 input. This can be repeated for up to 3 slaves REs.

Measure the delay and enter the value into the slave configuration in nanoseconds.

20-10

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – CPU Cabling

CPU 2

(Slave)

CPU 1

(Master)

Punch Block

RJ-45

A B C

White/Orange

INPUT

White/Blue

Blue/White

Orange/White

Connect Pins A3 and C5 of CPU 1 to pins 4 and 5 of CPU 2.

Using CAT 5 cable at 25 feet, the delay is

40 nanoseconds, entered into the Slave CPU configuration.

For longer runs, cut the cable and cross-connect at the 66 block.

Measure the delay, and enter in the slave configuration in nanoseconds.

Fig. 20-9 CPU1 to CPU2 Connection

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

20-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – CPU Cabling

CPU 1

Slave 1

A B C

White/Blue

Blue/White

CAT 5

Cable

CAT 5

Cable

CPU 1

Slave 2

A B C

CPU 2

Master

Output

66 Block

White/Blue

Blue/White

CAT 5

Cable

White/Orange

Orange/White

White/Blue

Blue/White

RJ-45

White/Green

Green/White

CAT 5

Cable

CPU

_White/BluS_elave

A B C

Using Cat 5 cable, connect pins 1 & 2 (Blue pair),

4 & 5 (Orange pair), and 7 & 8 (Green pair)

of the CPU 2 to the connecting block.

Blue/White

Using CPU 1 Sync Replacement cable, AWS1154 cut one end off and

connect pins A3 and C5 of the CPU 1

to the connecting block (White/Blue and Blue/White).

Cross-connect CPU 2 to CPU 1 at the block. Measure the delay,

and enter the value in nanoseconds into each slave’s configuration.

Fig. 20-10 CPU2 to CPU1, CPU2 Master, CPU1 Slave, Multiple REs

20-12

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – CLU/SLU to Base Station Cabling

CHAPTER 21

Modular Cabinet – CLU/SLU to Base Station Cabling

21.1 Introduction

This chapter describes all the cabling between the CLU or SLU and the Base Station. Refer to

Chapter 19 on how to supply Base Station power for CLUs or SLUs.

The Modular Cabinet is provided with a ground strip to connect the CLU or SLU cables to ground

(see Fig. 21–1). These ground connections are necessary for EMI suppression reasons.

Two cables sets are used to interconnect the CLU/SLU to the MDF. Cable set NTM/TSRNB 101

29 is 16 ft. long and is terminated in a 25 pair amphenol. Cable set NTM/TSRNB 101 46 is two 82

ft. 12 pair cables unterminated.

Note:

The orientation of the shielding clamps shall be according to Fig. 21–1. If the clamp is positioned at

the wrong side, remove the clamp and fit it such that it is positioned correctly.

Shielding clamp at the back row

Shielding clamps at the front row

Fig. 21–1 Ground Strip with Shielding Clamps

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

21-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – CLU/SLU to Base Station Cabling

21.2 Installation of Cables

Note:

Base Stations with cables longer than 1.3 miles up to 2.17 miles must always be connected to a

CLU with product code REX-BRD0014 or ROFNB 157 11/2.

Base Station with cables of up to 1.3 miles can be connected to a CLU/SLU with product code

REX-BRD0014 (ROFNB 157 11/2) or REX-BRD0015 (ROFNB 157 16/1) or REX-BRD0016

(ROFNB 157 16/2).

CLU/SLU to the MDF

Cable sets NTM/TSRNB 101 29 and NTM/TSRNB 101 46 connect from the CLU/SLU boards in

the modular cabinet to 66 blocks (or equivalents) on the MDF. Refer to the Table 21-2 and 21-3 for

the pinout of the respective cables.

1. Connect the plug of CLU/MDF cable TSRNB 101 29/2 (or the long cable TSRNB 101 46/2) to

the upper connector of the furthest right CLU or SLU as shown in Fig. 21–2.

2. Connect the plug of CLU/MDF cable TSRNB 101 29/1 (or the long cable TSRNB 101 46/1) to

the lower connector of the same CLU or SLU as in the previous step.

3. Screw the shielding clamp of TSRNB 101 29/2 (or TSRNB 101 46/2) to the furthest right free

position on the ground strip using two M3 x 10 torx screws delivered with the Modular Cabinet.

4. Screw the shielding clamp of TSRNB 101 29/1 (or TSRNB 101 46/1) to the next furthest right

free position on the ground strip.

5. Connect the cable set TSRNB 101 29 to the provided 66 blocks via the 25 pair amphenol

connector. Connect the cable set TSRNB 101 46 to the provided 66 blocks, or any other block

by punching the wires down. Circuit wiring is shown in Table 21-2.

Note:

To meet EMC requirements, the cable should never be cut to a length shorter than 8.20 ft.

21-2

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – CLU/SLU to Base Station Cabling

Base

Station

Power

To cable TSRNB 101 33

CLC8

CLC7

CLC6

CLC5

To cable TSRNB 101 29/2 or

TSRNB 101 46/2

CLC4

CLC3

CLC2

CLC1

To cable TSRNB 101 29/1 or

TSRNB 101 46/1

Fig. 21–2 CLU/MDF Cable Connections on the CLU or SLU

Base Station Power

The following installation steps are necessary when the Base Stations are powered via the

Modular Cabinet. Refer to Chapter 19 on how to supply Base Station power to the MCCB.

1. Connect connectors PW1 on the MCCB to the Base Station power connectors on the furthest

left CLU or SLU using the CLU/MCCB Power cable (see Fig. 21–2).

2. Connect PW2 – PW7 to the power connections of the other CLU or SLUs starting at the next

CLU or SLU.

Cabling from the MDF to the Base Station

Refer to Section 4, Chapter 4, Base Station Powering for cable type information. Figure 21-3

shows the pinout of the 66 blocks that the cable set NTM/TSRNB 101 29 terminates on. NOTICE

that only 3 pairs are brought out for each base station. These are SC0, SC1 and EPP0/1.

You must hook up the first 2 pair, SC0 and SC1, for each base station. The third pair, EPP0/1, is

only used when additional power is required due to cabling distances. (Refer to Section 4,

Chapter 4, Base Station Powering).

If a fourth pair (white/brown pair) is required then it may be punched down on top of the existing

EPP0/1, pair (white/green pair).

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

21-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – CLU/SLU to Base Station Cabling

RJ 45

DCT1900 66 BLOCK BASE STATION WIRING

WHITE / BLUE

SC1- 0

SC1-1

SC0-0

SC0-1

BLUE / WHITE

WHITE / ORANGE

ORANGE / WHITE

BASE

ST ATION

NO. 1

WHITE / GREEN

GREEN / WHITE

EPP0

EPP1

WHITE / BLUE

BLUE / WHITE

WHITE / ORANGE

ORANGE / WHITE

WHITE / GREEN

BASE

ST ATION

NO. 2

GREEN / WHITE

WHITE / BLUE

BLUE / WHITE

WHITE / ORANGE

ORANGE / WHITE

WHITE / GREEN

BASE

ST ATION

NO. 3

GREEN / WHITE

WHITE / BLUE

BLUE / WHITE

WHITE / ORANGE

ORANGE / WHITE

BASE

ST ATION

NO. 4

WHITE / GREEN

GREEN / WHITE

WHITE / BLUE

BLUE / WHITE

BASE

ST ATION

NO. 5

WHITE / ORANGE

ORANGE / WHITE

WHITE / GREEN

GREEN / WHITE

WHITE / BLUE

BLUE / WHITE

BASE

ST ATION

NO. 6

WHITE / ORANGE

ORANGE / WHITE

WHITE / GREEN

GREEN / WHITE

WHITE / BLUE

BLUE / WHITE

WHITE / ORANGE

BASE

ST ATION

NO. 7

ORANGE / WHITE

WHITE / GREEN

GREEN / WHITE

WHITE / BLUE

BLUE / WHITE

WHITE / ORANGE

BASE

ST ATION

NO. 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ORANGE / WHITE

WHITE / GREEN

GREEN / WHITE

BRIDGE CLIPS

* NOTE The White/Brown pair is not used in the RJ 45 connector,

if necessary for powering use it in another RJ 45 in pins 1 and 2

RJ 45 PLUG

Fig. 21-3 66 Block Diagram

21-4

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – CLU/SLU to Base Station Cabling

---------------------------------- BE AWARE

-------------------------------------------

----THIS IS NOT PINNED OUT AS A 568A OR 568B CONNECTOR-----

PIN 1

Green/White

White/Green

White/Blue

White/Brown

Brown/White

Blue/White

White/Orange

Orange/White

Fig. 21-4 Base Station RJ-45 Connector

If a base station is going to be powered locally, using an AC/DC adapter in the last IDF, then only

the first two pair, SC0 and SC1, should be hooked up for that Base Station on the 66 block. In the

last IDF, connect the output of the AC/DC adapter to the white/green pair going out to the RJ45

connector (Fig. 21-4) of the Base Station as shown in Figure 21-5.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

21-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – CLU/SLU to Base Station Cabling

RJ 45

PINS

FROM MDF

HOUSE PAIRS

66 BLOCK IN IDF

W/B

WHITE/BLUE – SC1-0

BLUE/WHITE – SC1-1

WHITE/ORANGE – SC0-0

ORANGE/WHITE – SC0-1

B/W

W/O

O/W

W/G (-)

G/W (+)

(-)

(+)

AC/DC

ADAPTER

Fig. 21-5 Local Powering of a Base Station

Note: If a Base Station is going to be powered locally, then the CLU/SLU board that it is

connected to MUST NOT have the CLU/MCCB power cable (TSRNB 101 33) hooked up to it.

This means that all 8 Base Stations on that CLU/SLU board can only be powered locally!

Warning

IF Base Station cables go outside the building, the system must be protected from

lightning strikes by surge arresters.

Refer to Ascom Application Note AN_0252 for UL approval Lightning Protection

Devices and Installation Procedures.

21-6

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – CLU/SLU to Base Station Cabling

Record Keeping

Make a copy of the Base Station identification and location sheet included at the end of this

chapter and fill in the information as you add your Base Stations. Refer to Section 2, Chapter 5,

paragraph 5.4 in this manual for Base Station Numbering. An example of how to fill in the sheet

starting with cable pair 1 of the CLU/MDF cable TSRNB 101 29/1 (see Table 21-3) or TSRNB 101

4611 (see Table 21-2) is given in Table 21-1.

Base

Station Id

Cabinet

number

CLU or SLU

board position

CLC

number

Delay *

Location of Base Station

Building A, floor 1, room 100

Building A, floor 2, room 122

Building A, floor 2, corridor at room 050

Table 21–1 Example of Base Station Administration

Note: Delay* - If you are using the SLU or CLU-S boards, then the delay will .1 for all Base

Stations.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

21-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – CLU/SLU to Base Station Cabling

Cable

Cable pair Colour

CLC

Signal

white – blue

CLC1

SC1

white – orange

white – green

white – brown

white – grey

red – blue

SC0

EPP0 – EPP1

SC1

CLC2

CLC3

CLC4

CLC5

CLC6

CLC7

CLC8

SC0

EPP0 – EPP1

SC1

red – orange

red – green

red – brown

red – grey

SC0

EPP0 – EPP1

SC1

black – blue

black – orange

white – blue

white – orange

white – green

white – brown

white – grey

red – blue

SC0

EPP0 – EPP1

SC1

SC0

EPP0 – EPP1

SC1

SC0

EPP0 – EPP1

SC1

red – orange

red – green

red – brown

red – grey

SC0

EPP0 – EPP1

SC1

black – blue

black – orange

SC0

EPP0 – EPP1

Table 21–2 Identification of the Cable Pairs in NTM/TSRNB 101 46

21-8

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – CLU/SLU to Base Station Cabling

Connector

Cable Pair-Pin

1-3

Wire Color

White

Blue

25 Pair Connector Pin

Signal Name

SC1-0 Circuit 1

SC1-1

1-2

2-7

White

Orange

White

Green

White

Brown

White

Gray

SC0-0

2-6

SC0-1

3-5

EPP0

3-4

EPP1

4-11

4-10

5-15

5-14

6-13

6-12

7-19

7-18

8-23

8-22

9-21

9-20

10-27

10-26

11-31

11-30

12-29

12-28

SC1-0 Circuit 2

SC1-1

SC0-0

SC0-1

Red

EPP0

Blue

EPP1

Red

SC1-0 Circuit 3

SC1-1

Orange

Red

SC0-0

Green

Red

SC0-1

EPP0

Brown

Red

EPP1

SC1-0 Circuit 4

SC1-1

Gray

Black

Blue

SC0-0

SC0-1

Black

Orange

EPP0

EPP1

Table 21-3 CLU to 66 Block Cabling

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

21-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – CLU/SLU to Base Station Cabling

1-3

1-2

White

Blue

SC1-0 Circuit 5

SC1-1

2-7

White

Orange

White

Green

White

Brown

White

Gray

SC0-0

2-6

SC0-1

3-5

EPP0

3-4

EPP1

4-11

4-10

5-15

5-14

6-13

6-12

7-19

7-18

8-23

8-22

9-21

9-20

10-27

10-26

11-30

12-29

12-28

SC1-0 Circuit 6

SC1-1

SC0-0

SC0-1

Red

EPP0

Blue

EPP1

Red

SC1-0 Circuit 7

SC1-1

Orange

Red

SC0-0

Green

Red

SC0-1

EPP0

Brown

Red

EPP1

SC1-0 Cicuit 8

SC1-1

Gray

Blue

SC0-1

Black

Orange

EPP0

EPP1

Table 21-3 CLU to 66 Block Cabling (cont.)

21-10

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – CLU/SLU to Base Station Cabling

Base Station Identification and Location Sheet

Base

Station ID

Cabinet

Number

CLU or SLU

Board

CLC

Number

Delay

Location of Base

Station

Position

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

21-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – CLU/SLU to Base Station Cabling

21-12

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – DTU Cabling

CHAPTER 22

Modular Cabinet – DTU Cabling

22.1 Introduction

This chapter describes the installation of the cabling between the DTU(s) and MS/PBX by means

of twisted pair cables. The description is applicable for DTU-E1CAS, REX-BRD0002 or

2/ROFNB 157 13/1, DTU-E1 CCS REX-BRD0003 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/6 and DTU-T1, REX-

BRD0021 or 2/ROFNB 157 13/3 and 2/ROFNB 157 13/2 .

The Modular Cabinet is provided with a ground strip to connect the cables from the DTUs and the

CLUs/SLUs to ground. These ground connections are necessary for EMI suppression.

Note:

The orientation of the shielding clamps shall be according to Figure 22–1. If the clamp is

positioned at the wrong side, remove the clamp and fit it such that it is positioned correctly.

Shielding clamp at the back row

Shielding clamps at the front row

Fig. 22–1 Ground Strip with Shielding Clamps

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

22-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – DTU Cabling

22.2 Installation - DTU-E1

Connecting the DTUs to the MS/PBX

1. Ensure the DTU strap settings are in the twisted pair position (refer to Chapter 11).

2. Connect the lower X2 plug of DTU twisted pair cable AWS1034 to the lower connector of the

DTU as shown in Figure 22–2.

3. Connect the upper X1 plug of DTU twisted pair cable to the upper connector.

4. Screw the shielding clamp of the cable to the furthest left free position on the ground strip

using two M3 x 10 torx 10 screws delivered with the Modular Cabinet.

5. Connect the other end of the DTU cable as required - normally punched down on the Main

Distribution Frame (MDF) or “66” block.

Dual DTU E1 cable

AWS1034

XMIT

pairs

BRN

GRN

ORN

BLU

WHT

RCV

pairs

View looking into DTU board edge

Fig. 22–2 DTC Connections on the DTU-E1

22-2

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – DTU Cabling

22.3 Installation - DTU-T1 (CAS or CCS)

Connecting the DTUs to the MS/PBX

1. Ensure the DTU strap settings are in the twisted pair position (refer to Chapters 12 & 13).

2. Connect the lower X2 plug of the DTU twisted pair cable AWS1033 to the lower connector of

the furthest left DTU as shown in Figure 22-3.

3. Connect the upper X1 of the DTU twisted pair cable to the upper connector.

4. Screw the shielding clamp of the cable the furthest left free position on the ground strip using

two M3 x 10 torx screws delivered with the Modular Cabinet.

5. Connect the other end of the DTU cable as required - normally punched down on the Main

Distribution Frame (MDF) or “66” block.

Dual DTU T1 cable

AWS1033

XMIT

pairs

BRN

GRN

ORN

BLU

WHT

RCV

pairs

View looking into DTU board edge

Fig. 22–3 DTC Connections on the DTU-T1

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

22-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – DTU Cabling

22-4

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – LTU Cabling

CHAPTER 23

Modular Cabinet – LTU Cabling

23.1 Introduction

This chapter describes the installation of the cabling between the LTU(s) and the PBX. The LTU

cable set, NTM/TSRNB 101 31, consists of two 12 pair cables terminated in one 25 pair amphenol

connector. The other end of each cable ends in three Ericsson half connectors. Refer to Chapter

26, Modular Cabinet cables, for a cable schematic and physical description.

Each LTU cable is designed to connect three LTU boards, thus 24 analog extensions, to a single

66 Block. The cable terminates in a 25 pair male amphenol connector which mates with a

Siemens 66m250 Block or the connector can be cut off and the cables punched down on other

types of blocks. Refer to Table 23-1 for a pin out of the cable

The Modular Cabinet is provided with a ground strip to connect the cables from the LTUs and the

CLUs to ground. These ground connections are necessary for EMI suppression reasons.

Note:

The orientation of the shielding clamps shall be according to Figure 23-1. If the clamp is positioned

at the wrong side, remove the clamp and position it properly.

Shielding clamp at the back row

Shielding clamps at the front row

Fig. 23–1 Ground Strip with Shielding Clamps

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

23-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – LTU Cabling

23.2 Installation

The six connectors on the LTU end of the cables are labelled 1 through 6 and should be installed

as shown in Figure 23-2. Connectors 1 & 2 go to the first LTU, connectors 3 & 4 go to the second

LTU, and cables 5 & 6 go to the third LTU.

LTU Ground

Fig. 23-2 LTU/MDF Cable Connections to the LTU

23-2

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – LTU Cabling

The amphenol end of the cable is pinned out as follows:

Connector

Cable Pair-Pin Wire Color

25 Pair

Signal Name

Connector Pin

1-5

1-6

2-1

2-2

3-5

3-6

4-1

4-2

5-5

5-6

6-1

6-2

7-5

7-6

8-1

8-2

9-5

9-6

10-1

10-2

11-5

11-6

12-1

12-2

1-5

1-6

2-1

2-2

3-5

3-6

4-1

4-2

5-5

5-6

6-1

6-2

White

Blue

Analog Channel - 1T

Analog Channel - 1R

Analog Channel - 2T

Analog Channel - 2R

Analog Channel - 3T

Analog Channel - 3R

Analog Channel - 4T

Analog Channel - 4R

Analog Channel - 5T

Analog Channel - 5R

Analog Channel - 6T

Analog Channel - 6R

Analog Channel - 7T

Analoog Channel - 7R

Analog Channel - 8T

Analog Channel - 8R

Analog Channel - 9T

Analog Channel - 9R

Analog Channel - 10T

Analog Channel - 10R

Analog Channel - 11T

Analog Channel - 11R

Analog Channel - 12T

Analog Channel - 12R

Analog Channel - 13T

Analog Channel - 13R

Analog Channel - 14T

Analog Channel - 14R

Analog Channel - 15T

Analog Channel - 15R

Analog Channel - 16T

Analog Channel - 16R

Analog Channel - 17T

Analog Channel - 17R

Analog Channel - 18T

Analog Channel - 18R

White

Orange

White

Green

White

Brown

White

Gray

Red

Blue

Red

Orange

Red

Green

Red

Brown

Red

Gray

Black

Blue

Black

Orange

White

Blue

White

Orange

White

Green

White

Brown

White

Gray

Red

Blue

Table 23-1 LTU to 66 Block Cabling

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

23-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – LTU Cabling

Connector

Cable Pair-In

Wire Color

25 Pair

Signal Name

Connector Pin

7-5

7-6

Red

Analog Channel - 19T

Analog Channel -19R

Analog Channel - 20T

Analog Channel - 20R

Analog Channel - 21T

Analog Channel - 21R

Analog Channel - 22T

Analog Channel - 22R

Analog Channel - 23T

Analog Channel - 23R

Analog Channel -24T

Analog Channel -24R

Orange

Red

8-1

8-2

Green

Red

9-5

9-6

Brown

Red

10-1

10-2

11-5

11-6

12-1

12-2

Gray

Black

Blue

Black

Orange

Table 23-1 LTU to 66 Block Cabling (cont.)

Analog channel 1 tip/ring will appear at the top of the 66 Block. Analog channel 24 tip/ring will

appear on the second to the last pair of the punch down clips at the bottom of the Block. Pair 25 is

not used and is not connected.

Note:

To meet the EMC requirements, the cable should never be cut to a length shorter than 8.2 ft.

Signalling Ground for LTU when using Earth Signalling for Recall

The signalling ground is only applicable when earth signalling is used instead of timed break

signalling. The MCCB connect the signalling ground from the PBX to maximum of 7 LTUs.

1. Connect the PBX signalling ground from the MDF to the PBX screw connector on the MCCB.

2. If more Modular Cabinets are used in a system, chain the PBX connectors.

3. Connect an LTU/MCCB ground cable (TSRNB 101 035) to the LTU1 connector on the MCCB.

4. Connect the other end of the LTU/MCCB ground cable to the LTU ground connector on the

furthest left LTU (see Fig. 23-2).

23-4

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – DLU Cabling

CHAPTER 24

Modular Cabinet – DLU Cabling

24.1 Introduction

This chapter describes the installation of the cabling between the DLU(s) and the PBX. The DLU

cable set, AWS1019, consists of (12) 2 pair cables individually terminated in a RJ11 connector.

Each DLU cable is designed to connect two DLU boards, thus 24 digital extensions, to a single 66

Block. The cable terminates in a 25 pair male AMP connector which mates with a Siemens

66m250 Block or the connector can be cut off and the cables punched down on other types of

blocks. Refer to Table 24-1 for a pin out of the cable

The Modular Cabinet is provided with a ground strip to connect the cables from the DLUs and the

CLUs to ground. These ground connections are necessary for EMI suppression reasons.

24.2 Installation

The 24 connectors on the DLU end of the cables are labelled P1 through P24 and should be

installed as shown in Fig. 24-2. Connector 1 goes to the first port of the DLU which is at the bottom

of the board. The male AMP is connected to the 66 Block.

The orientation of the shielding clamps should be as shown in Fig. 24-1.

Shielding clamp at the back row

Shielding clamps at the front row

Fig. 24–1 Ground Strip with Shielding Clamps

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

24-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P12

P11

P12

P11

P10

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – DLU Cabling

ascom

LED1

LED2

LED3

LED4

LED1

LED2

LED3

LED4

RS232

Serial Port

COM 1

port 12

COM 1

port 12

RJ45

Connectors

port 7

port 6

port 7

port 6

port 1

DLU

port 1

DLU

Fig. 24–2 DLU Board

24-2

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – DLU Cabling

24.3 Connection to PBX’s

Connecting the DLUs to the PBX

1. Screw the shielding clamp of AWS1019 to the furthest left free position on the ground strip

using two M3 x 10 torx screws delivered with the Modular Cabinet.

2. Connect the RJ-45 terminated end of the DLU cable by matching the labeled terminations with

the corresponding board position indicated in Fig. 24-2.

3. Connect the male AMP connector to the 66 block.

4. If 66 blocks are not permissible in the switch room due to preference or standardization

practices the AMP connector may be cut off and the cable may be punched down in standard

telecom color code. See Table Fig. 24-1 for the pinout of the AWS1019 DLU/MDF Cable.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

24-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Installation Instructions, Modular Cabinet – DLU Cabling

DLU Cable Diagram:

Cable #

Wire Pair

BLU/WHT

ORG/WHT

GRN/WHT

BRN/WHT

SLT/WHT

BLU/RED

ORG/RED

GRN/RED

BRN/RED

SLT/RED

BLU/BLK

ORG/BLK

BLU/WHT

ORG/WHT

GRN/WHT

BRN/WHT

SLT/WHT

BLU/RED

ORG/RED

GRN/RED

BRN/RED

SLT/RED

BLU/BLK

ORG/BLK

Color

BLU

ORG

GRN

BRN

WHT

BLU

From

J1-1

Color

WHT

RED

BLK

From

J1-26

J1-27

J1-28

J1-29

J1-30

J1-31

J1-32

J1-33

J1-34

J1-35

J1-36

J1-37

J1-38

J1-39

J1-40

J1-41

J1-42

J1-43

J1-44

J1-45

J1-46

J1-47

J1-48

J1-49

P1-4

P1-5

J1-2

P2-4

P2-5

J1-3

P3-4

P3-5

J1-4

P4-4

P4-5

J1-5

P5-4

P5-5

J1-6

P6-4

P6-5

J1-7

P7-4

P7-5

J1-8

P8-4

P8-5

J1-9

P9-4

P9-5

J1-10

J1-11

J1-12

J1-13

J1-14

J1-15

J1-16

J1-17

J1-18

J1-19

J1-20

J1-21

J1-22

J1-23

J1-24

P10-4

P11-4

P12-4

P13-4

P14-4

P15-4

P16-4

P17-4

P18-4

P19-4

P20-4

P21-4

P22-4

P23-4

P24-4

P10-5

P11-5

P12-5

P13-5

P14-5

P15-5

P16-5

P17-5

P18-5

P19-5

P20-5

P21-5

P22-5

P23-5

P24-5

BLK

WHT

RED

BLK

Table. 24-1 Pinout

24-4

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

CHAPTER 25

Use of TDR

25.1 Introduction

When programming Remote Base Stations using the CSMW Software, it is necessary to

determine the time delay of the Base Station cable. This is done using a TDR (Time Domain

Reflectometer). See the following paragraph for instruction on how to measure the delay of the

Base Station cable.

25.2 Determining the Delay of Remote Base Station Cable

The following instructions explain how delay is measured using the Tektronix model 1503B or

1503C TDR.

Refer to Figure 25-1 for an illustration of the front panel controls. In this illustration, each control is

numbered and the numbers are used to identify each control in the procedure that follows.

Fig.25-1 TDR Controls

1. Turn power on (7). When you see a horizontal trace and division marks on the screen, the

TDR is ready to use.

2. Set Impedance (2) to 93 ohms.

3. Set Noise Filter (3) to 1 AVG.

4. Set Vertical Scale (4) to 0.00dB

5. Set DIST/DIV (5) to 100 ft.

6. Set V (6) to .99.

7. Set Pulse Width (8) to 100 nS.

8. Center the trace using the vertical POSITION control (9).

9. Connect the test cable (terminated with two alligator clips) to the input jack (1).

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

25-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

10. A waveform similar to the one shown in Figure 25-1 should be displayed, however the vertical

pulse will be located at the left edge of the screen. This is the transmitted pulse the TDR uses

to determine the length of the cable.

11. Rotate the horizontal POSITION control (10) until the vertical line it controls is all the way

against the left edge of the screen. At this point, the upper right corner of the display should

show either 0.00 ft. or some negative value.

12. Connect the pair to be measured to the test cable using the alligator clips. At this point the pair

should not be connected to either the base station or the radio exchange, and should be left

open-circuited at the far end. Adjust the DIST/DIV control (5) until the display shows not only

the transmitted pulse on the left (as in Figure 25-1) but also the reflected pulse farther to the

right. This pulse should have the same polarity (positive) as the transmitted pulse. It may be

necessary to adjust the Vertical Scale (4) control and/or the Pulse Width control (8) so that the

transmitted and reflected pulses are clearly defined and separated as in Figure 25-2.

Figure 24-2 Transmitted and Reflected Pulses

Now, adjust the horizontal Position control (10) until the vertical line it controls is exactly at the

leading edge of the reflected pulse. At this point, have someone short the pair at the far end while

observing the display. The reflected pulse should invert as the pair is shorted. If not, the pair may

be open at some point or you may be testing the wrong pair. Correct the condition and retest until

the proper result is obtained.

Have the person at the far end remove the short and observe that the reflected pulse returns to

positive polarity and that it is still aligned with the vertical line. If the pulse has shifted, this is an

indication that the pair may be open on one side. Correct the condition and retest until the proper

result is obtained.

Note the indication in the upper right corner of the display, indicated in feet. Multiply this indicated

length in feet by the constant .001025 microseconds/foot. This will yield the delay of the pair in

microseconds.

Example: Assume a reading of 167.7 ft.

167.7 ft. x .001025 = .17189 microseconds

Record the calculated delay in microseconds. This value will be used to determine the proper

value to enter when adding a Remote Base Station using the Cordless System Manager software

for windows.

As the system allows entries only in increments of 0.1, it will be necessary to round.

25-2

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900

Examples:

.17189 should be rounded to .2

.13125 should be rounded to .1

Follow this procedure for each Remote Base Station pair to ensure that they are in good condition

and that the delay is identical for pairs that go to the same base station.

Install-DCT1900/R8/mw

25-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Product Manual - DCT1900